GB2215877A - Data processing system - Google Patents
Data processing system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- GB2215877A GB2215877A GB8806851A GB8806851A GB2215877A GB 2215877 A GB2215877 A GB 2215877A GB 8806851 A GB8806851 A GB 8806851A GB 8806851 A GB8806851 A GB 8806851A GB 2215877 A GB2215877 A GB 2215877A
- Authority
- GB
- United Kingdom
- Prior art keywords
- data
- address
- module
- register
- bus
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Withdrawn
Links
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 title abstract description 89
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 abstract description 524
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 abstract description 159
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 description 462
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 103
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 71
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 69
- 238000007667 floating Methods 0.000 description 62
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 60
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 58
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 45
- 230000009183 running Effects 0.000 description 42
- 230000003139 buffering effect Effects 0.000 description 27
- 230000002457 bidirectional effect Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 25
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 24
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 24
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 24
- 241000566369 Palthis Species 0.000 description 21
- 239000000306 component Substances 0.000 description 21
- 240000007320 Pinus strobus Species 0.000 description 17
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 description 17
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 14
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 14
- 210000000078 claw Anatomy 0.000 description 13
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 13
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 13
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 12
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000003278 mimic effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000003607 modifier Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 11
- 241000255777 Lepidoptera Species 0.000 description 10
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000000638 solvent extraction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005056 compaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001351 cycling effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000011982 device technology Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229920000136 polysorbate Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229940012720 subsys Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 101001030591 Homo sapiens Mitochondrial ubiquitin ligase activator of NFKB 1 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100038531 Mitochondrial ubiquitin ligase activator of NFKB 1 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 238000013528 artificial neural network Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000003642 hunger Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000012432 intermediate storage Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008449 language Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000013508 migration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005012 migration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012797 qualification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000037351 starvation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002459 sustained effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 2
- ZNJRONVKWRHYBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2-[2-(1-azatricyclo[7.3.1.05,13]trideca-5,7,9(13)-trien-7-yl)ethenyl]-6-methylpyran-4-ylidene]propanedinitrile Chemical compound O1C(C)=CC(=C(C#N)C#N)C=C1C=CC1=CC(CCCN2CCC3)=C2C3=C1 ZNJRONVKWRHYBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100011399 Danio rerio eif3ea gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008016 Eukaryotic Initiation Factor-3 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000282326 Felis catus Species 0.000 description 1
- 229910001218 Gallium arsenide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 101000625226 Homo sapiens Melanoregulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000886818 Homo sapiens PDZ domain-containing protein GIPC1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150008815 INT6 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100024976 Melanoregulin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- JEYCTXHKTXCGPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methaqualone Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1N1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2N=C1C JEYCTXHKTXCGPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100039983 PDZ domain-containing protein GIPC1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001684 chronic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- DERZBLKQOCDDDZ-JLHYYAGUSA-N cinnarizine Chemical compound C1CN(C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)CCN1C\C=C\C1=CC=CC=C1 DERZBLKQOCDDDZ-JLHYYAGUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000593 degrading effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- SLPJGDQJLTYWCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N dimethyl-(4,5,6,7-tetrabromo-1h-benzoimidazol-2-yl)-amine Chemical compound BrC1=C(Br)C(Br)=C2NC(N(C)C)=NC2=C1Br SLPJGDQJLTYWCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- PJMPHNIQZUBGLI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fentanyl Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1N(C(=O)CC)C(CC1)CCN1CCC1=CC=CC=C1 PJMPHNIQZUBGLI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000013467 fragmentation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006062 fragmentation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003292 glue Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002789 length control Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007087 memory ability Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940036310 program Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003252 repetitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000002020 sage Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000010187 selection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000013589 supplement Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002123 temporal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010200 validation analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003079 width control Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003245 working effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F9/00—Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
- G06F9/06—Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
- G06F9/30—Arrangements for executing machine instructions, e.g. instruction decode
- G06F9/38—Concurrent instruction execution, e.g. pipeline or look ahead
- G06F9/3877—Concurrent instruction execution, e.g. pipeline or look ahead using a slave processor, e.g. coprocessor
- G06F9/3879—Concurrent instruction execution, e.g. pipeline or look ahead using a slave processor, e.g. coprocessor for non-native instruction execution, e.g. executing a command; for Java instruction set
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F15/00—Digital computers in general; Data processing equipment in general
- G06F15/76—Architectures of general purpose stored program computers
- G06F15/80—Architectures of general purpose stored program computers comprising an array of processing units with common control, e.g. single instruction multiple data processors
- G06F15/8053—Vector processors
- G06F15/8061—Details on data memory access
- G06F15/8069—Details on data memory access using a cache
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Software Systems (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computing Systems (AREA)
- Multi Processors (AREA)
- Memory System Of A Hierarchy Structure (AREA)
Abstract
A processing subsystem which includes one or more numeric processors, 130, and also at least one application-customized processor. The application-customized processor is particular adapted for some particular class of operations, such as discrete Fourier transform operations, and the numeric processor provides acceptably high speed on the general range of numeric computations. A control processor, 110 runs concurrently to the other processors, and can perform many tasks invisibly to them (such as address calculation and data transfer). Preferably a separate data transfer processor 120 is used, which handles external interface needs, and which also runs concurrently in background to the numeric and application-specific processors. <IMAGE>
Description
Svstem with Algorithm Accelerators
PARTIAL WAIVER OF COPYRIGHT
All of the material in this patent application is subject
to copyright protection under the copyright laws of the
United Kingdom, the United States, and of other countries. As of the first effective filing date of the present application, this material is protected as unpublished material.
However, permission to copy this material is hereby granted to the extent that the copyright owner has no objection to the facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent document or patent disclosure, as it appears in official patent file or records of the United Kingdom or any other country, but otherwise reserves all copyright rights whatsoever.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to computergystems and subsystems, and to computer-based methods for data processing.
Specialized Hardware Architectures
A variety of specialized processor architectures, which are particularly useful for particular applications, have been proposed. However, much less attentiori has been paid to how such specialized architectures can be integrated in a general-purpose numeric processing architecture. Also, relatively little attention has been paid to generalized interface management for algorithm-specific processors.
Architectural Versatilitv
A wide variety of architectures for supercomputers, "mini-supercomputers," "super-minicomputers," and numeric accelerator boards have been proposed. See, for example, K. Hwang & F. Briggs, Computer Architecture and
Parallel Processing (1985), which is hereby incorporated by
reference. However, a chronic problem is that the many in
teresting architectures proposed are generally quite varied,
so that a tremendous user investment is required to fully
come up to speed on each new architecture. This variation is
driven by numerous factors, including variation at the chip
level. Since semiconductor manufacturers compete vigor
ously to introduce integrated circuits which are useful for
new system designs, a variety of attractive chip designs are
constantly appearing.However, the choice of a chip set will
usually determine significant aspects of the architecture, at
least as seen by the user. Different chips will have different
pin-out and routing requirements, and may have different instruction sets and data handling protocols.
Algorithm Realizations
The Fast Fourier Transform was a major advance in
numeric computation. This algorithm partitions the'' Fourier
transform into a series of fairly simple "butterfly" calcula
tions. This algorithm made digital computation of Fourier
transforms practical in a wide variety of applications. How
ever, since the capability to do integral transforms is irii- mensely useful, there - has been continued effort to further
reduce the computational burden of digital Fourier
transforms. Additional discussion of this may be found in L.
Rabiner & B. Gold, Theorv and Application of Digital Signal
Processing (1975), which is hereby incorporated by refer
ence.
Fourier transforms, two-dimensional Fourier trans
forms (also known as Hankel transforms), and other integral
transforms have been widely researched for use in image
processing algorithms. However, the computational burden
associated with such transforms has restricted their use in
image processing.
A very recent overview of some of the issues involved in multiprocessor systems may be found in Dubois et al., "Synchronization, Coherence, and Event Ordering in Multiprocessors," Computer magazine, February 1988, page 9, which is hereby incorporated by reference. A recently proposed multiprocessor architecture for digital signal processing is described in Lang et al., "An Optimum Parallel Architecture for High-Speed Real-Time Digital Signal Processing," Compu ter magazine, February 1988, page 47, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Cache Memorv Architectures
Cache memory is a conventional way to increase the net throughput of computing systems. If a large fraction of memory accesses are expected to call on memory locations already in cache, then every read from cache can save an amount of time equal to the difference between the cache access time and the main memory access time. Therefore, cache memory systems normally attempt to maximize the bandwidth to the cache.
FEATURES AND ADVANTAGES
The present application provides a large number of in
novative teachings, which will be described in the general
context of a system like that shown in Figure 1.
Among the innovative teachings set forth herein is a
processing subsystem which includes one or more numeric
processors, and also at least one application-customized pro
cessor - (or "algorithm accelerator"). The application-cus
tomized processor is selected to be particularly well adapted
for some particular clasp of operations, such as discrete
Fourier transform operations. A general-purpose numeric processor can be used to provide acceptably high speed on
the general range of numeric computations. A control pro
cessor runs concurrently to the other processors, and can
perform many tasks invisibly to them (such as address calculation and data transfer).Preferably a separate data
transfer processor is used, which handles external interface
needs, and which also runs concurrently in background to
the numeric and application-specific processors.
It is well known that special purpose computers al
ways outperform the more general purpose ones in their
area of specialization. The subsystem shown in Figure 1 can
itself be r#egarded as a special purpose computer (of the ar
ray processor or vector processor type), but by the addition
of algorithm accelerators (or application accelerators) it can
be made much more specialized. The algorithm accelerators
can be used instead of or in addition to the more general
floating-point processor modules.
Most users of array processors have one or two algo
rithms that constitute the bulk of their calculations. In such cases, hardware which is designed to favor this particular al
gorithm will yield a big improvement over a general-pur
pose floating-point processor module. For example, the fast
Fourier transform (FFT) algorithm is very important in sig
nal and image processing. The standard floating-point pro
cessor can do a 1K complex FFT in 1.6 ms, but the FFT algo
rithm accelerator provided by one embodiment of the in
vention can do it in 200 microsecond (with comparable com
ponents). The FFT algorithm is so important to some users
that general calculation capability is clearly second priority.
In such a case, four FFT accelerators could be used to reduce
the net FFT time down to 50 microseconds. This is a very big
improvement over the general floating-point processor case.
Preferably the application-customized processor is an
application-customized numeric processor. However, the ap
plication-customized processor could optionally (and less
preferably) be of ç a more exotic variety, such as a symbolic
processor (i.e. a processor which has the extra data paths
needed to run LISP or PROLOG with high efficiency), or a
neural network machine.
The present invention will be described with particu lar reference to a system embodiment like that shown in
Figure 1 (or, alternatively, those of Figures 9A, 10, 41, or
43.) It should be understood that the features of these em
bodiments are not all necessary parts of the present inven
tion, but they do provide the context in which the preferred
embodiment will be described.
Figure 1 generally shows an architecture for a numeric
processing system. Such systems are commonly referred to
as "accelerator boards". They are normally used as sub-sys
tems. That is, a supervisor processor will provide a high
level command to the accelerator subsystem. For example,
the supervisor processor may order the accelerator subsys
tem to perform a vector add, a matrix inversion, or a fast
Fourier transform (FFT). The accelerator subsystem will then fetch the data from the location specified by the supervisor
processor, perform the number-crunching operations, and
return the result to the supervisor processor.
Figure 1 shows an architecture with three different
processor modules, all of which can run different tasks con currently. These three modules are the control processor module 110, the data transfer processor module 120, and the numeric processing module 130. (This numeric processing module is preferably a floating-point processing module, and will therefore often be referred to as the "FP" module.)
The numeric processor module 130 runs asynchronously to the other two processors, i.e. with a completely independent clock. In addition, the external interfaces 150, 160, 170, and 180 also contain substantial amounts of logic.
A A number of architectural innovations are designed to push the accelerator subsystem up to the maximum speed permitted by the arithmetic hardware. For example, in the presently preferred embodiment the numeric processor module 130 includes a 32-bit ALU and a hardware 32-bit multiplier. Fast multipliers of this type are now standard commercial parts, but the problems of building a fast system to use such hardware efficiently are immense.
Several key points in making such an architecture successful relate to cache bandwidth. The data rate available from the cache 140 is extremely high, and this is a very important factor in net throughput. However, it is also necessary to transfer data between the cache and the external interfaces efficiently, without losing the speed advantage of the numeric processing module 130. That is, to take advantage of the high internal speed of the numeric processing module 130, it is highly desirable that the computation process not be required to stop while data transfers are occurring.
Another general area of focus relates to time scales.
The numeric processing module 130 is pushed to maximum speed, and this means that its control functions must be kept fairly simple. The control processor module and the datatransfer processor module are used to implement higherlevel functions, but this necessarily means that they will run more slowly. Since the numeric processing module 130 must
share the cache 140 with thê bthe processors, the temporal
aspects of the interface at the edge of the numeric process
ing module 130 are very delicate.
Thus, the structure of the data cache memory 140, and
its relation to the other blocks in the system, is quite signifi
cant. One significant teaching is that the data cache memory
140 is connected to the floating point processor 130 by a
wide cache bus 144. In the presently preferred embodiment,
the cache bus 144 includes 256 physical lines reserved for
data. (In addition to the data lines, control lines also link the
various blocks shown.)
To get a very high memory bandwidth, there are only
three basic strategies: l. Use very fast memorv devices. The problem here is
one of economics and size. Very fast memory devices are
very expensive, sometimes as much as ten times the cost of
the slower counterparts, and the number of storage bits per
device is more limited.The major advantage of this tech
nique is that the bandwidth improvement is independent of
the data layout in memory (assuming that the address gen
erator is fast enough).
2. Use interleaved memories: Interleaved memories have traditionally been used with dynamic RAMs (DRAMs), where the cycle times have been longer than the access times. In this context, a significant advantage can be gained by interleaving two or more banks and offsetting the timing between banks. The problem with this technique occurs when successive accesses keep hitting the same bank, or accesses through another port (in a multiport memory)) disturbs the sequential accessing of banks. This technique can be used with static memories (SRAMs), but the equal access and cycle times make it less attractive than with DRAMs.
3. Use a wide memory structure. Normally the memory width would be the same as the word width. For example, a system using a 32-bit words would typically use a 32-bit wide memory architecture. However, several of the innovative teachings set forth herein show how a system with a much wider local bus to cache memory can be very advantageous.
A wide memory structure accesses many sequential words in parallel to increase the bandwidth. Such a structure has much simpler timing requirements than an interleaved memory architecture would. The major limitation on this method is that non-sequential accesses will ultimately reduce the bandwidth down to what a normal single-width architecture will provide.
This memory architecture also has advantages in a multi-port situation where some or all of the ports have a much lower bandwidth than the memory itself. In these cases there will be some intermediate storage (normally registers) to capture the data for later accessing over several cycles by the recipient. While such time-multiplexed accesses are in progress, there is no demand on the memory system for bandwidth.
For maximum speed, each of the processors in the preferred system is microcoded. However, some significant performance issues have also been encountered, related to the use of microcoding in a high-speed multiprocessor system. Several innovations disclosed herein help to improve the performance of systems of this kind.
The module 130 is preferably a floating point processor, but it will often be- referred to more generically as a numeric processor. As will be discussed below, various other data calculation units, each containing at least one independent processor, can be substituted for the floating point processor 130.
The three types of processor modules permit easy task allocation. The primary allocation of tasks is as follows:
the data transfer processor manages the interface to the outside world, through the external interfaces, and also handles data transfer between the cache memory and the outside world;
the control processor 110 performs address calculations, and controls all data transfers to and from the numeric processing module 130; and
the numeric processing module 130 performs data calculations.
Designing an efficient high-speed system to support this allocation of tasks requires that some significant architectural difficulties be solved. However, the disclosed innovations solve these difficulties, and the result turns out to be surprisingly- advantageous.
To facilitate realization of such an architecture, the embodiment of Figure 1 contains several notable hardware features. First, the control processor 110 includes a very large capability for address calculation operations. In the presently preferred embodiment, as generally shown in Figure 2, this processor includes not only a sequencer, but also address generation logic and an arithmetic-logic-unit (ALU).
The data transfer processor 120 supervises the operation of the external interface controllers. In the presently preferred embodiment, there are actually three external interface controllers. These include a VME bus interface 160, and also controllers for two backplane busses. (One backplane bus is a "data pipe," which provides a high-bandwidth link between accelerators, and the other is a "GIP bus," which is optimized for transmission of image or graphics data.) Each of these three bus interfaces includes its own control logic, preferably including a controller. For example, the VME bus interface includes a direct-memory-access (DMA) controller, for expedited block data transfer. However, the data transfer processor 120 provides a high-level supervision for all of these interfaces.
A critical part of this architecture is the cache memory 140. This cache memory is not only very wide (256 bits), large (preferably at least 2 megabytes), and fast (100 nanoseconds access time as presently configured, and preferably much faster), but is also effectively tri-ported.
The memory is preferably only dual ported physically, and arbitration between the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor 120 is accomplished in their microcoded instruction scheme.
Note also that the three ports of the cache memory 140 are quite different. In general, in most numeric processing subsystems it has been found that the bandwidth between the cache memory and the number-crunching components is of critical importance. Therefore, in the presently preferred embodiment, the port to numeric processor 130 is much wider (and therefore has a much higher bandwidth) than the ports to the control processor and data transfer processor. In the presently preferred embodiment, the latter ports are only 32 bits wide. Moreover, a set of fully parallel registers is used at the 32-bit ports, so that all accesses to these ports are seen by the cache memory 140 as fully parallel, i.e. as 256-bit parallel reads or writes.
Thus, this architecture addresses the problem posed by many prior architectures, wherein number-crunching throughput and cache bandwidth have been the critical path bottlenecks. The architecture of this preferred embodiment relieves these- constraints.
In fact, the presently preferred embodiment also include one further major step in this direction. The interface to the numeric processing module 130 is so defined that multiple modules 130 can be used in parallel, all under the control of a single control processor 110, and all accessing a common data cache. The extremely high bandwidth of the cache bus 144 is an important factor in achieving this result.
The interface between the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor module 120 also provides significant advantages in efficiently exploiting the cache. In the
presently preferred embodiment, some significant features
are used to improve the advantages of this interaction. First,
as is common in the art of microprogrammed processors,
both the control processor 110 and the data transfer proces
sor 120 preferably use variable-duration instructions. That
is, some instruction types require substantially longer cycle
times than others. For example, to give extreme cases, a no
operation instruction or an unconditional branch would re
quire far less processor time than a multiply.Thus, it has
been common to use variable-duration clocks for controlling
processors, whe#re the clock generator looks at the instruc
tion type being executed and adjusts the duration of the
clock interval accordingly, on the fly.
In the presently preferred embodiment, both the con
trol processor 110 and the data-transfer processor 120 are
clocked by a shared variable-duration clock. Thus, the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor 120 are
enabled to run synchronously, even though they are concurrently running separate streams of instructions. Obviously, when one processor has requested a shorter cycle duration, that processor will lose some efficiency when the clock is temporarily slowed to produce the longer duration requested by the other processor. However, this inefficiency is minor, because the majority of instructions will specify the shortest cycle time.
In addition, a further level of arbitration is also provided. The control processor 110 is given priority on access to the cache memory 140. That is, the data transfer processor 120 must check before every cache access, to ensure that cache access has not been preempted by the control processor 110. However, to prevent lock-out, the data transfer processor 120 has an interrupt signal available to it, which will command the control processor 110 to release control of the cache port 142 for at least one cycle.
Of course, the advantages of the innovative subsystem enabled by the disclosed innovations are also advantages for the computer system as a whole. Moreover, many of the innovative teachings set forth herein can also be adapted to computing systems which do not contain a separate subsystem like that shown in Figure 1, i.e. to more simply structured stand alone computer systems. Nevertheless, Figure 1 is the presently preferred best mode context of most of the innovations disclosed herein, and therefore much of the description will particularly relate to the context of Figure 1, or to alternative versions such as are shown in Figures 9A, 10, or 43.
The architecture of the preferred embodiment is geared to running certain classes of algorithms very efficiently. However, in general, it is not as efficient at executing algorithms with a large amount of "non-ordered" scalar calculations or complex conditional control. The subsystem of the pr#eferred embodiment will have the greatest comparative advantage in executing algorithms which have repetitive calculation sequences with very little conditional control and large dynamic number ranges. Within this category lie:
Vector calculations: These include operations on or between arrays of numbers such as adding two arrays together.
Signal and image processing: This includes such operations as convolution, FIR filters, Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT) and statistics. Histogram and mapping algorithms can be executed reasonably efficiently by using the integer processing capabilities of the floating point processor.
Graphics: This architecture is particularly well suited to transformation, intersection and perspective calculations. Even the complexities involved in hidden surface removal and clipping (i.e. the conditional control aspects) are easily overcome if the algorithm is partitioned correctly.
A number of features (some innovative, and some known separately in other contexts) contribute to achieving the - performance advantages of the preferred embodiment.
Some notable ones of these features include:
A number-crunching module which has very high floating point performance on real world algorithms (better than 50 Mflops), sustainable over a reasonable period of time.
Independent high speed Input/Output capability, which can occur in parallel with the floating point calculations without degrading the floating point calculation rate.
The innovative structure permits easy microcode programming.
Large, high bandwidth data memory, capable of supporting# the data intensive calculations at full speed.
A wide variety of interfaces are provided.
This architecture also provides a "future-proof" design, so that faster components can be used when they become available, with little change to the hardware and software.
Multi-accelerator configurations can be used, to increase the overall system performance by adding more subsystems in a pipeline or- parallel fashion.
All these features have been achieved in the preferred embodiment.
The architecture of Figure 1 will be discussed in much greater detail below, but first it will be informative to look at how this multiprocessor structure can be used.
Most algorithms can be broken down into four separate parts:
Control,
Data input and output,
Address calculations, and
Data calculations.
The preferred architecture treats these as separate
tasks, and maps them onto the three processors. The control
and address calculations are handled by the Control Proces
sor (CP) Module 110, the data I/O tasks are handled by the
Data Transfer Processor (DTP) Module 120, and the data cal
culations are handled by the Floating-point Processor (FP)
Module 130.
The three types of processor modules will sometimes
be referred to by abbreviations in the following text. For ex
ample, the microcode which runs in the data transfer pro
cessor module 120 may be referred to as the DTP microcode.
Similarly, the microcode which runs in the control processor
110 may be referred to as the CP microcode, and the mi
crocode which runs in the numeric processing module 130
may be referred to as FP microcode. These abbreviations
will be used regarding other features as well.
Among the innovative teachings set forth herein is a
numeric processing subsystem, where three types of proces
sors concurrently run separate processes. One of these pro
cessors is a data transfer processor, which controls the ex
ternal interface, and at least one is preferably a floating
point processor. (One of the three is preferably a control processor.) Preferably this subsystem also includes at least a
megabyte of cache memory, which is linked to the floating
point processor by a very high-bandwidth bus.
The use of three processors means that the control
processor can perform address calculations while the float
ing-point processor is performing data calculations. More
over, the data transfer processor can perform data fetches in
background to the other two. Thus, data calculations can be
run at nearly 100% efficiency, without waiting for address
calculations. Moreover, the data and address calculations will
not always have to wait during external data fetches and
saves, since the data-transfer processor can perform some of these in background to the control and numeric processing modules.
The use of three processor types is particularly advantageous, because computer run algorithms usually split into 3 separate areas: I/O, address related calculations, and data related calculations. Separating the functions in this fashion, and allocating them to autonomous processors, gives a number of advantages:
1. All three phases of an algorithm can run in parallel or concurrently, and hence a higher throughput can be achieved. Depending on the problem addressed, the parallelism may be inter-algorithm or intra-algorithm.
2. The division of the algorithm makes programming easier, because each part of the problem can be solved in isolation from the remainder. However, this is only true if the programmer doesn't need to monitor too many synchronization details.
3. The architecture of each processor is much simpler, because it has less of the overall problem to solve.
Thus, this architecture derives advantages from a simple partial solution to the generally difficult problem of algorithm partition in multiprocessor systems.
The . innovative teachings set forth herein permit these benefits to be achieved, by making the interfaces between the processors very clean and simple. A number of advantages result:
1. One of the processors can be upgraded without affecting the others.
2. A totally different type of processor can be substituted for one (or more) of the numeric processors.
(This point is further discussed below.)
3. The clean interface allows multiple units to be supported.
4. The software investment is protected. If the system is changed by replacing one of the processors, only the software for that processor must be changed. (In many cases, all that will need to be done is to re-assemble the software with some new microcode definitions.)
The use of a high-bandwidth bus to link the floatingpoint processor to the data cache cooperates advantageously with this architecture. If the floating-point processor throughput is to be the limiting factor in net throughput, then the bandwidth limitations on interfacing to the floating-point processor are extremely critical.
Moreover, this architecture permits multiple floatingpoint processors to be used if desired, to further increase throughput. That is, net algorithm throughput can be increased until it is fairly close to the net throughput of the critical path of arithmetic computations. This means that system net throughput can be greatly increased without incurring the substantial costs of exotic device technology, such as GaAs chips, optical line drivers, etc.
Each of the processors is separately microcoded. Thus, programming in this environment requires manipulation of three separate streams of microcode, which are asynchronous except at synchronization points. However, to simplify programming - and minimize program storage requirements, the interface to the control processor is preferably constrained so that the control processor has the same instruction sequence for all arithmetic operations of a given type.For example, all operations which map two arrays onto a third - regardless of what operation is performed on the individual scalar components - would have identical microinstruction sequences for the control processor. (Of course, the instruction sequences for the floating-point processor would vary.)
This architecture provides many of the throughput advantages of a fully asynchronous multiprocessor architecture, but many of the usual difficulties of programming (and of programming support) in a multiprocessor ar chitecture are avoided. That is, the three (or more) processors in this architecture are operating as a multiple-instruction-multiple-data-stream (MIMD) system, but the programming environment is very simple.
A particular aspect of this architecture is the handling of synchronization points. Since at least some task allocation among the three processors is at a fairly low level (as just described), synchronization points (where two or more processors, which have been running asynchronously, must interface) are fairly common. This is particularly critical between the control processor and the floating-point processor, since the separation of data calculations from address calculations will be less advantageous if the floating-point processor has to wait at synchronization points.
Handshaking between the control processor and the floating-point processor is preferably accomplished by a pair of "processor-waiting" status signals which have a unique state table. The use of "processor-waiting" rather than "processor-busy" status signals, each of which can be written or cleared by either processor under some conditions, provides a fast and reliable interface.
In general, when two (or more) processors, working together, need to exchange data and results, the one of them which finishes first must wait for the other. When both have finished, they can do the exchange and then continue with their work. In the presently preferred embodiment, this situation can occurs as frequently as every 500 ns between the control processor and the floating-point processor.
The control processor provides the next set of data for the floating-point processor to work on and removes the previous set of results. The floating-point processor takes a set of data, does some calculations and produces some results. At each of these "synchronization points," where the exchange of data and results takes place, it is very important that the minimum amount of time is lost. In particular, the processor which finished last is likely to be the busiest one, and slowing it down will limit the overall performance. In the presently preferred embodiment, a handshake mechanism is used which allows the busiest processor to pass through a synchronization point without stopping. Since this can be done in parallel with the last operation before the synchronization point is reached, no time is lost.
Two status signals control the handshake process (FPWAIT and CPWAIT). When asserted, these signals can each cause the corresponding processor to wait at the synchronization poi#nt. When ,the control processor finishes its work, it asserts the signal CPDONE (Under corresponding conditions the floating-point processor will assert FPDONE.)
The DONE signals cause the WAIT signals to be disasserted.
The state table of the presently preferred embodiment gives the control processor more latitude to adjust flags than the other processors have.
One class of embodiments uses a system which includes two or more numeric processors, both running concurrently with a control processor and a data-transfer processor. Some factors which help make embodiments of this class work well include:
1. The very high memory bandwidth between the data cache memory and the floating-point processor modules allows a number of them to be working in parallel without suffering data starvation. The number of floatingpoint processor (FP) modules that can operate in a system depends very much on the algorithm or algorithm mix. In the presently preferred embodiment, this has been limited to four. This limitation has been imposed primarily for electrical and mechanical reasons. However, once all the memory bandwidth has been used there is no advantage in increasing the number of floating-point processor modules.
2. The floating-point processors run autonomously. The module interface is therfore not required to include any protocols for floating-point processor to floatingpoint processor synchronization or data exchange. This keeps the interfaces very simple, by avoiding the need for arbitration.
Preferably an instruction write bus is shared by the numeric and/or application-customized processors. Preferably the most significant address bits are decided according to logic such that any one of the numeric and/or applicationcustomized processors can be addressed individually, all -of these processors can be addressed together, or some (but not all) groups of these processors can be addressed together.
That is, the control of multiple floating-point processors needs to take into account the fact that an algorithm might run on any one of the floating-point processors present, or parts of it might run on some or all of the floatingpoint processors present. This may require defining a long term or short term control relationship between the control processor and the floating-point processor.
In the presently preferred embodiment, this is achieved by using a microcode bit that selects, on a per cycle basis, what control mechanism will select the active floating point processor module. The control mechanism can be either the use of other microcode bits, or the use of the . contents of a register (which would have been preloaded by the microcode). The bits in the microcode instruction field can be used for definition in the short term, i.e. on a per cycle basis, while the register defines the long term usage.
Examples of the use of the two modes might be:
Short term - When doing an FFT with 4 floatingpoint processors the control processor will spend a few cycles with one floating-point processor, loading the next butterfly's data and collecting the previous butterfly's results, before moving on to the next floating-point processor to deal with another butterfly.
Long term - When doing a vector add the floating-point processor to use is selected before the vector add routine (in the control processor) is called. This means that the control processor doesn't need to know which floatingpoint processor (or type of floating-point processor) is being used to do the calculations.
Among the innovative teachings set forth herein is a multiprocessor numeric processing subsystem, wherein the interface to the numeric processing hardware is constrained in ways which permit a variety of integrated circuits can be readily substituted.
The present invention provides a system where the floating-point processor and its support logic are isolated as a module. A module interface is defined so as to be independent of the floating point chip set. Thus it is possible to design a new module with a different floating point unit, without having to change the rest of the system. Some of the advantages of this approach are:
1. As technology improves, faster floating point units will become available. Using the innovative architecture disclosed herein, only a comparatively small amount of work will be necessary to use the newer, more advanced devices.
2. Semiconductor manufactures are sometimes overly optimistic in their timescales, their ability to make the device, and/or the actual performance of the device. The disclosed innovative architecture permits additional flexibility in systems design. Thus, if the integrated circuit supplier has problems, a systems designer can readily use a different chip set without having to make substantial system design changes.
To achieve this chip-independence without sacrificing speed, an extremely flexible and highly multiported register file is preferably used at the interface from the cache memory to the numeric processing subsystem. To achieve algo rithm flexibility, parallel writes from data cache memory to the control storage of the numeric processing subsystem are preferably possible.
Virtually any floating point device(s) can be used in the floating-point processor module 130. This degree of flexibility has been achieved by isolating the floating po#int unit from the other portions of the subsystem, and providing a very simple interface (via the register files). The benefits of this approach are numerous:
When new (and hopefully faster) floating point arithmetic units (FPUs) become available, they can be incorporated into a new module, and the accelerator system's performance increased on computation-limited algorithms.
When using leading edge technologies, there is always the danger that the manufacturer of the FPU may have problems supplying the part. If this occurs, then the novel features of the present invention permit changing to a different FPU very easily.
Software investment is protected, because only the floating-point processor module 130 part of any algorithm will change. There is a very good chance that re-assembling the floating-point processor module 130 microcode with a new set of definitions will cover most changes. If this is not true (in cases where the new FPU is radically different), then a rewrite of the microcode will be needed. However, this will normally be simple, because the floating-point processor module 130 routines are usually a simple list of arithmetic operations with very little conditional control.
Changing the arithmetic chips in the FP module 130 will, in most cases, only require a few months of design effort. This means that very rapid production changes can be made to adapt to new generations of FPU.
The modular approach and the simple interface to the rest of the multiprocessor subsystem facilitate the development of algorithm-customized modules at relatively low cost. Such algorithm-customized modules can give a vast improvement in performance.
Up to four processor modules can be readily be combined in a single subsystem. Some algorithms are very processor limited, and can benefit from dividing the work load between two or more numeric processorsFP modules.
(Obviously, if an algorithm is limited by the data transfer rate on the cache bus, then there will be no benefit in a configuration with multiple numeric processor modules 130.) Algorithm specific modules can be mixed with the standard floating-point modules, to allow an increase in performance in particular areas without losing the general processing capability of a standard floating-point processor module.
The# presently preferred embodiment of these teachings is in a numeric processing subsystem like that generally shown in Figure 9A. This embodiment will be described in great detail below.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWING
The present invention will be described with reference
to the accompanying drawings, which show important sam
ple embodiments of the invention and which are incorpo
rated in the specification hereof by reference, wherein:
Figure 1 shows a general overview of a numeric accel
erator subsystem having a novel three-processor architec
ture.
Figure 2A generally shows the organization of some ke~f parts of the Control Processor module 110, in the
presently preferred embodiment. Figure 2B schematically
shows the field allocations in the microinstruction format
used in the Control Processor module 110, in the presently
preferred embodiment.
Figure 3A generally shows the organization of some
key parts of the Data Transfer Processor module, #in the
presently preferred embodiment. Figure 3B shows greater
detail of the logic used to selectably drive a constant address
onto the sequencer bus 315 in the Data Transfer Processor
module. Figure 3C schematically shows the field allocations
in the microinstruction format used in the Data Transfer
Processor module 120, in the presently preferred embodi ment.
Figures 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D generally show the organi
zation of some key parts of the numeric processing module
130, which in the presently preferred embodiment is a
Floating-Point Processor. Figure 4A shows some key parts of
the interface to the Control Processor module 110. Figure 4B
shows some key parts of the data path in the Floating-Point
Processor, in the presently preferred embodiment. Figure 4C
shows some key parts of the control logic in the Floating
Point Processor, in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 4D schematically shows the field allocations in the
microinstruction format used in the Numeric Processor mod
ule 130, in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 5 generally shows the organization of some key parts of -the Data Cache Memory, in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 6 generally shows the organization of some key parts of the Host Interface Logic, in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 7 generally shows the organization of some key parts of the Data Pipe Interface Logic, in the presently preferred embodiment.
-Figure 8 generally shows the organization of some key parts of the GIP Interface Logic, in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 9A shows a general overview of a numeric accelerator subsystem including an application-customized numeric processing module ("algorithm accelerator") 130'.
Figure 9B schematically shows how the architecture of one example of an algorithm accelerator 130' differs from that of a general-purpose floating-point module 130.
Figure 10 shows a subsystem including multiple numeric processing sub-subsystems.
Figure 11 generally shows the organization of some key parts of the Integer Processor Unit, which is part of the
control processor (and of the data-transfer processor) in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 12 generally shows the organization of some
key parts of the Address generator, which is part of the
control processor in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 13 generally shows the organization of some
key parts of the Sequencer, which is part of the control pro
cessor (and also of the data transfer processor) in the
presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 14A schematically shows the hardware used, in
the presently preferred embodiment, to permit a 16-bit ad
dress generator (or other low-resolution subprocessor) to be
used in a 32-bit system. Figure 14B shows the inputs used in the different operating modes of the hardware used, in the presently preferred embodiment, to use low-resolution data sources in a high-speed system.
Figure 15 schematically shows the interface between the control processing module and the data transfer processing module, in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 16 generally shows the organization of some key parts of the primary data path for numeric operations, within the floating-point processor in the presently preferred embodiment.
Figure 17 shows the logic used within the floatingpoint processor in the presently preferred embodiment, to reduce the setup time for unregistered microcode bits.
Figure 18 shows how a conventional double buffer is organized and controlled in hardware.
Figure 19 shows another conventional method for double buffering, where a dual port register file is used with one of the bits controlled externally.
Figure 20 schematically shows how the innovative double buffer of the presently preferred embodiment is organized and controlled in software, to provide multiple op
tional access modes.
Figure 21 schematically shows the logic used, in the presently preferred embodiment, for data transfer across a
clock boundary. between the holding registers, which inter
face to the 256-bit wide cache bus, and the Register File,
which is only 64 bits wide.
Figure 22 shows a state diagram of the handshaking
logic used, in the presently preferred embodiment, to pro
vide interfacing between the CP module 110 and the FP
module 130.
Figure 23 schematically shows the control definitions
used, in the presently preferred embodiment, to select
among multiple FPs and/or multiple algorithm accelerators,
in a system like that shown in Figures 9 or 10.
Figures 24, 25, and 26 show the architecture of the data interfaces to the cache memory.
Figure 27 schematically shows the hardware configuration used, in the presently preferred embodiment, to permit efficient control of microcode transfer and loading in a serial loop which interfaces to the writable control storage of several devices.
Figure 28 schematically shows the serial loop configuration used, in the presently preferred embodiment, to permit microcode loading to any one of several processors, or to some groups of processors.
Figure 29 schematically shows the logic used, in the presently preferred embodiment, to permit either serial or parallel write into the control store of a numeric processor in a multi-processor system.
Figure 30 schematically shows the microcode operation used in the presently preferred embodiment to provide multiway branching without address boundary constraints.
Figure 31 schematically shows a method of running a discrete Fourier transform algorithm.
Figure 32 shows a method of run#ning a histogram al
gorithm, in hardware like that shown in Figure 16.
Figure 33 shows a method of running a pipelined algorithm, in hardware which includes a software-controlled
double buffer like that shown in Figure 20.
- Figures 34, 35, 36, and 37 schematically show configu
rations of multiple subsystems like that of Figure 1, each of
which includes a data pipe interface like that shown in Fig
ure 7.
Figure 38A generally shows the preferred physical
layout of the main board, and Figure 38B generally shows
the preferred physical layout of a daughter board which
nests onto the board of Figure 38A. The board of Figure 38B
contains key components of FP module 130. The two boards together provide a complete system like that shown in Figure 1.
Figure 39 shows the preferred embodiment of the stack register in the floating-point processor module 130.
Figure 40A shows some support logic which is used, in the presently preferred embodiment, with the sequencer in the control processor module 110 (and in the data transfer module 120). Figure 40B schematically shows a microinstruction sequence wherein an interrupt occurs during a multiway branch operation.
Figure 41 schematically shows a computer system including a host computer, a picture processor subsystem, and at least two numeric accelerator subsystems, linked by a main bus and two high-bandwidth backplane busses.
Figure 42 schematically shows the flow of steps, in a system like that shown in Figure 1, to multiply two arrays together (on an element by element basis) and deposit the results in a third array.
Figure 43 shows a sample system which includes a high-speed cache expansion memory on the same very wide data bus as one or more numeric processing modules.
Figures 44A, 44B, and 44C schematically indicate the programming environment of the CP, DTP, and FP modules respectively.
Figure 45 shows logic for substituting the contents of an instruction register for a field of microcode from control
store.
Figure 46 shows how word address odd/even structure results from the double-word transfer operations.
Figure 47 shows the timing structure used for how word address odd/even structure results from the double word transfer operations.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
The numerous innovative teachings of the present application will be described with particular reference to the presently preferred embodiment, wherein these innovative teachings are advantageously applied to the particular problems of subsystems which can work under the direction of a host computer to handle high-speed numeric computing. (Such subsystems are commonly referred to as "accelerator boards.") However, it should be understood that this embodiment is only one example of the many advantageous uses of the innovative teachings herein. For example, the various types of the architectural innovations disclosed herein can optionally be adapted to a wide variety of computer system contexts. In general, statements made in the
specification of the present application do not necessarily
delimit any of the various claimed inventions.Moreover,
some statements may apply to some inventive features but
not to others.
Overview The present invention will be described with particu
lar reference to the context of a system embodiment like
that shown in Figure 1 (or, alternatively, those of Figures 9A,
10, 41, or 43.) It should be understood that the features of
these embodiments are not all necessary parts of the pre
sent invention, but they do provide the context in which the
preferred embodiment will be described.
Figure 1 generally shows an architecture for a numeric
processing system, which normally is used as a subsystem of
a larger computer system. Systems like that of Figure 1 are
commonly referred to as "accelerator boards". They are
normally used as sub-systems. That is, a supervisor proces
sor will provide a high-level command to the accelerator
subsystem. For example, the supervisor processor may order
the accelerator subsystem to perform a vector add, a matrix
inversion, or a fast Fourier transform (FFT). The accelerator
subsystem will then fetch the data from the location speci
fied by the supervisor processor, perform the number
crunching operations, and return the result to the supervisor
processor.
Figure 1 shows an architecture with three different
processor modules, all of which can run different tasks con
currently. These three modules are the control processor
(CP) module 110, the data transfer processor (DTP) module 120, and the numeric processing module 130. (This numeric
processing module is preferably a floating-point processing
module, and will therefore often be referred to as the "FP"
module. Various other types of numeric processing modules
can be used, as will be discussed below.) The numeric pro
cessor module 130 runs asynchronously to the other two
processors, i.e. with a completely independent clock. In ad
dition, the external interfaces 150, 160, 170, and 180 also
contain substantial amounts of logic.
The structure of the data cache memory 140, and its
relation to the other blocks in the system, is quite signifi
cant. The data cache memory 140 is connected to the floating point processor 130 by a wide cache bus 144. In the
presently preferred embodiment, the cache bus 144 includes
256 physical lines reserved for data.
The three types of processor modules permit easy task
allocation. The primary allocation of tasks is as follows:
the data transfer processor manages the inter
face to the outside world, through the external interfaces,
and also handles data transfer between the cache memory
and the outside world;
the control processor 110 performs address cal
culations, and controls all data transfers to and from the
numeric processing module 130; and
the numeric processing module 130 performs data calculations.
Designing an efficient high-speed system to support this allocation of tasks requires that some significant architectural difficulties be solved. However, the disclosed innovations solve these difficulties, and the result turns out to be surprisingly advantageous.
To facilitate realization of such an architecture, the embodiment of Figure 1 contains several notable hardware features. First, the control processor 110 includes a very large capability - for address calculation . operations. In the presently preferred embodiment, as generally shown in Figure 2, this processor includes not only a sequencer, but also address generation logic and an arithmetic-logic-unit (ALU).
The data transfer processor 120 supervises the operation of the external interface controllers. In the presently preferred embodiment, there are actually three external interface controllers. These include a VME bus interface 160, and also controllers for two backplane busses. (One backplane bus is a "data pipe," which provides high-bandwidth link between accelerators, and the other is a "GIP bus," which is optimized for transmission of image or graphics data.) Each of these three bus interfaces includes its own
control logic, preferably including a controller. For example,
the VME bus interface includes a direct-memory-access
(DMA) controller, for expedited block data transfer. How
ever, the data transfer processor 120 provides a high-level
supervision for all of these interfaces.
A critical part of this architecture is the cache memory
140. This cache memory is not only very wide (256 bits),
large (preferably at least 2 megabytes), and fast (100
nanoseconds access time as presently configured, and
preferably much faster), but is also effectively tri-ported.
The memory is preferably only dual ported physically, and
arbitration between the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor 120 is accomplished in their microcoded instruction scheme.
Note also that the three ports of the cache memory 140 are quite different. In general, in most numeric processing subsystems it has been found that the bandwidth between the cache memory and the number-crunching components is of critical importance. Therefore, in the presently preferred embodiment, the port to numeric processor 130 is much wider (and therefore has a much higher bandwidth) than the ports to - the control processor and data transfer processor. In the presently preferred embodiment, the latter ports are only 32 bits wide. Moreover, a set of fully parallel registers is used at the 32-bit ports, so that all accesses to these ports are seen by the cache memory 140 as fully parallel i.e. as 256-bit parallel reads or writes.
The interface to the numeric processing module 130 is so defined that multiple modules 130 can be used in paral lel, all under the control of a single control processor 110 and all accessing (preferably) a single data cache module 140. The extremely high bandwidth of the cache bus 144 is an important factor in achieving this multi-module capability.
The interface between the control processor 1110 and the data transfer processor module 120 also provides significant advantages in efficiently exploiting the cache. In the presently preferred embodiment, some significant features are used to improve the advantages of this interaction. First, as is common in the art of microprogrammed processors, both the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor 120 preferably use variable-duration instructions. That is, some instruction types require substantially longer cycle times than others. For example, to give extreme cases, a nooperation instruction or an unconditional branch would require far less processor time than a multiply instruction.
Thus, it has been common to use variable-duration clocks for controlling processors, where the clock generator looks at the instruction type being executed and adjusts the duration of the clock interval accordingly, on the fly.
In the presently preferred embodiment, both the control processor 110 and the data-transfer processor 120 are clocked by a shared variable-duration clock. Thus, the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor 120 are enabled to run synchronously, even though they are concurrently running separate streams of instructions.
The control processor 110 is given priority on access to the cache memory 140. That is, the data transfer processor
120 must check before every cache access, to ensure that cache access has not been preempted by the control proces
sor 110. However, to prevent lock-out, the data transfer processor 120 has an interrupt signal available to it, which will command the control processor 110 to release control of the cache port for at least one cycle.
The three types of processor modules will sometimes
be referred to by abbreviations in the following text. For ex
ample, the microcode which runs in the data transfer pro
cessor module 120 may be referred to as the DTP microcode.
Similarly, the microcode which runs in the control processor
110 may be referred to as the CP microcode, and the mi
crocode which runs in the numeric processing module 130
may be referred to as FP microcode. These abbreviations
will be used regarding other features as well.
Design Goals
The subsystem of the presently preferred embodiment
has been designed to give a very high floating point number
crunching performance with small size and at low cost.
Two system contexts have been targets for use of this
subsystem: this subsystem is well suited for use as a floating
point accelerator for a wide range of general-purpose host computers. (In particular, compatibility with UNIX engines is desirable.)
It is also contemplated that the accelerator system of
Figure 1 may be very advantageous in a specialized picture processing system. An example of such a system would be a graphics and image processing system, manufactured by benchMark Technologies Ltd., and referred to as the "GIP" system. (The GIP systems include a number of features to give very high throughput in a wide range of graphics and image applications.) Such a system, including an accelerator subsystem like those shown in Figures 1, 9A, 10, 43, etc., may be particularly advantageous for running three-dimen
sional graphics algorithms.
Division of algorithms
The architecture of Figure 1 will be discussed in much
greater detail below, but first it will be informative to look
at how this multiprocessor structure can be used.
As noted above, most algorithms can be broken down
into four separate parts: Control, Data input and output, Ad
dress calculations, and Data calculations.
The preferred architecture treats these as separate
tasks, and maps them onto the three processors. The control
and- address calculations are handled by the Control Proces
sor (CP) Module 110, the data I/O tasks are handled by the
Data Transfer Processor (DTP) Module 120, and the data cal
culations are handled by the Floating-point Processor (FP)
Module 130.
The division of an algorithm between the control pro
cessor module 110 and the FP is illustrated by the detailed
descriptions below, regarding some specific algorithm im
plementations. One good example is provided by the Fast
Fourier Transform (FFT) implementation discussed below,
with reference to Figure 31. The FFT algorithm is notoriously
difficult to program efficiently.
In this example, the FFT algorithm is divided between the control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130, by assigning the address calculations for the data samples and phase coefficients to the control processor module 110 and the butterfly calculations to the floatingpoint processor module 130.
The portion of the FFT software which runs in the CP module 110 calculates the address of the complex data, as a function of the stage and butterfly numbers. The complex phase coefficients are held in a table, and thus part of the software will also calculate the position of the needed coefficients in the table, as a function of the stage and butterfly numbers. Once the addresses have been calculated, the data and coefficients can be fetched and transferred over to the floating-point processor module 130. When the floatingpoint processor module 130 has completed the butterfly calculations, the control processor module 110 will read the results and save them before repeating the address calculations for the next butterfly.Note that -the control processor module 110 does not have to track the actual butterfly calculation; it merely interchanges data with the floating- point processor module 130 at synchronization points. Note
also that this software does not merely calculate address#es,
but also c9n-trols 'the actual data transfers between the cache
memory and the numeric processor.
The portion of the FFT software which runs in the
floating-point processor module 130, calculates the butterfly
by a simple linear sequence of instructions to implement the
butterfly calculations for the data set at each successive
stage. It knows nothing of the complicated address calcula
tions needed to provide the correct data and coefficients for
each stage. The code for the data calculations can therefore
be written without reference to the code for the data trans
fer operations.In fact, if it is desired to use a different de
sign for floating-point processor module 130 (e.g. to use a different floating point chip set, or a low-level data path architecture which is more optimized for FFTs), then only this (relatively simple) - portion of the software will require changing.
The execution of the CP and FP software occurs in parallel, and is pipelined so that the speed at which an algorithm runs is determined by the slowest part.
Architecture description
Some of the key parts of the subsystem of Figure 1 will now be described in greater detail. However, it should be understood that this is still only a summary description.
Far greater detail will be provided below.
Brief Review of CP Module 110 (Fig. 2A)
The Control Processor (CP) module 110 includes a 32 bit integer processor unit (IPU) 240, a microcode sequencer 210, an address generator (AG) 230, and miscellaneous items such as microprogram memory, clock generator, bus control, etc.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the integer processor unit 240 is a Weitek XL8137, the sequencer 210 is an an Analog Devices ADSP-1401, and the address generator 230 is an Analog Devices ADSP-1410. As will be readily understood by those skilled in the art, a wide variety of other components could be used instead, or equivalent functionality could be embodied in other blocks instead.
The control processor module 110 has two main tasks
to undertake:
It controls the operation of the board (at a higher
level), by interpreting commands from the host, requesting transfers by the DTP module 120, and initializing the float
ing-point processor module 130 before it starts data calcu
lations.
It generates addresses for the data cache memory, and controls the transfer and routing of data between the data cache memory and the FP module 130. This activity normally occurs repeatedly during the actual number crunching process, after the high level control operations have been completed. Loop control is handled by the sequencer, so that the address generator and IPU can be used exclusively for generating addresses.
Communication with other blocks is via a 32 bit wide data bus (CD bus 112), which allows the control processor module 110 to read and write to the data cache memory 140, command memory 190, and the control registers of FP module 130. The control processor module 110 can be in terrupted by the host (via the VME interface 160), by the floating-point processor module 130, or by the data transfer processor module 120. In normal operation (i.e. apart from program development and debugging) the only interrupt source will be the data transfer processor module 120.
Brief Review of DTP Module 12#0 (Fig. 3A)
The Data Transfer Processor (DTP) Module 120 is very
similar to the control processor module 110, from the pro
grammer's viewpoint, in that it uses the same 32 bit proces
sor and sequencer. The bus control and interface contral are obviously different. One other distinguishing feature from
the control processor module 110 is that the data transfer
processor module 120 has a microcode expansion port,
which permits it to control add-on boards (such as a bulk
memory card or a network card).
The data transfer processor module 120 has three
main tasks to undertake:
It controls the transfer of data between the data
cache memory and the external interfaces. (It does this in
response to high-level commands from the control processor
module 110 (or from the host).)
It transfers commands from the external interfaces to the command queues maintained in the command memory 190, for subsequent processing by the control processor module 110. Any of the external interfaces can provide commands, but initially it is -expected that the VME interface will be the main source.Suitable software will allow command lists to be held in the data cache memory (or command memory), and be called as macros. (This method is sometimes called "vector chaining."))
In the debug environment, the data transfer processor module 120 is the main interface between the debug monitor (running on the host) and the microcode being debugged in the data transfer processor module 120, control processor module 110 or floating-point processor module 130. It also gives the debug monitor access to the various memories that are not mapped into the VME address space.
The transfer of data and commands between the external interfaces, the data cache memory, command memory, VME interface memory, and the data transfer processor module 120 occurs over the 32 bit wide TD bus 122. The external interfaces 150, 160, and 170 are FIFO buffered, and interrupt the data transfer processor module 120 when they require attention, i.e. when they receive some data or- are getting empty. Additional interrupt sources are the host (via the VME interface), and the control processor module 110.
Access by the data transfer processor module 120 to the data cache memory is limited to cycles that are not used by the control processor module 110. (The CP module 110 may be using the memory either for transfers to the floating-point processor module 130 or for itself.) If the data transfer processor module 120 is forced to wait too long for access, it can steal a cycle by interrupting the control processor module 110.
Brief Review of FP Module 130 (Figs 4A-4C)
The Floating-point Processor Module 130 is located on a separate board, which plugs into the main base board. The operations of the floating-point processor module 130 may be considered as having two distinguishable parts:
(a) The microcoded floating point unit. This section undertakes the floating point calculations. The unit was designed to achieve one goal - to run as fast as possible, in order to obtain maximum performance from the floating point hardware devices. To meet these design aims, a very simple architecture is utilized. It includes a floating point multiplier, a floating point ALU (arithinetic and logic unit), fast multiport register files, and a very fast, but simple, sequencer#. In addition, a scratchpad memory is closely coupled to the inner data paths, to hold lookup tables and provide histogram storage.The floating point arithmetic units interface with the register files via two read ports and one write port. Another write port is connected to one of the read ports, to provide a data shuffle and replication capability.
The final port is bidirectional, and is used to pass data into and out of the register files.
(b) The data cache memorv interface. This part of the FP module interfaces data cache memory to the bidirectional port of the register files. There is a set of bidirectional registers between the register file and the data cache memory which pipelines the data transfers and also handles the data multiplexing and routing. The control for the transfer is generated in the transfer logic. Note that many parts of this interface, although physically located together with the FP module 130, are clocked with the CP module 110, and will generally be referred to as an extension CP module 110 rather than as part of the FP module
130.
A highly multi-ported fast register file is a key element in providing a clean interface between the control pro cessor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130.
One side of this register file runs synchronously to the control processor module 110, and the other side runs synchronously to the floating point processor module 130. Thus, this clock boundary placement permits changes to be made on one side of the boundary without affecting the other side.
This provides a migration path to faster, or more, integrated floating point chip sets, and hence floating point device independence.
Up to 4 floating-point processor modules 130 (or algorithm-customized modules 130') can be included in one such subsystem. Some examples of interest are shown in Figures 9A and 10.
Brief Review of DCM 140 (Fig. 5)
The Data Cache Memory 140 is a very high bandwidth, multi-ported memory. The architecture of this memory and its interfaces provides tremendous advantages in the overall performance of the system of the preferred embodiment.
The high bandwidth is necessary to keep the floating-point processor module 130 supplied with data (and to remove its results), when the floating-point processor module 130 is undertaking simple vector calculations. For example, a vector 'add' operation requires 3 number trans#fers per calculation; if the'floating-pqint processor module 130 is able to sustain a' calculation rate of 20 Mflops, the memory bandwidth required to keep up will be 240 Mbytes per second.
The data cache memory has a memory bank made up of 64K by 32 bit memory modules, providing 2 Mbytes of on-board storage. This may be expanded by the use of a remote memory expansion board 4310 which hangs onto the cache bus 144. (Physically, this memory expansion module plugs into the same connectors as the floating-point processor module 130 modules.) This memory expansion board, which will have the same bandwidth as the on-board data cache memory, can be configured to store an extra 12
Mbytes of memory in increments of 2 Mbytes. By using double capacity memory modules, the on-board storage may be increased to 4 Mbytes and the off-board to 24 Mbytes.
There are three ports to the data cache memory, one to each of the processors. However, in many respects it has been possible to treat the memory as only dual ported, because the data transfers to the control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module(s) 130 are all controlled by the CP microcode. Data transfers for the floating-point processor module "130 and control processor module 110 have priority over I/O transfers, so the data transfer processor module 120 may be forced to wait until there is a free memory cycle. If the data transfer processor module 120 is kept waiting too long, it can interrupt the control processor module 110 and gain access to the memory. This is not likely to be a problem, unless the control processor module 110 is undertaking random accesses.Even then, for block I/O transfers, the data transfer processor module 120 will requires 8 cycles to transfer the data per memory access, before it needs to request another block of data.
In order to obtain the high memory bandwidth with reasonable cycle time memory devices, a wide memory architecture has been chosen. The memory is 256 bits wide, so that in a single access cycle, 32 bytes (8 F~words) are transferred. With the memory cycling in periods of 100 ns,
the memory bandwidth is 320 Mbytes per second for block
transfers and 40 Mbytes per second for random F~word ac
cesses.
The data cache memory may also be used to hold mi
crocode overlays for the FP module 130. These can be
transferred into and out of the FP module's writable control
store (WCS) when the floating-point processor module 130
microcode exceeds the WCS size. The re-loading of the WCS
via this parallel load facility occurs very much faster than
the normal serial load under host control. In fact, this capa
bility is fast enough to allow dynamic paging of the mi
crocode.
Brief Review of CM 190
The Command Memory (CM) 190 is a small amount
(2K) of 32 bit wide memory, dual ported between the con
trol processor module 110 and data transfer processor mod
ule 120. Command, control and status data are passed be
tween the control processor module 110 and DTP via soft
ware queues or FIFOs maintained in this memory.
Half of this memory is reserved for use by the mi
crocode debug monitor, to hold the control processor module
110 and floating-point processor module 130 state informa
tion (as well as some command structures).
Brief Review of External Interfaces
The preferred embodiment includes several smart in
terfaces. The most important of these is the host interface
160 (also referred to as the VME interface). The VME inter
face interfaces the subsystem of the preferred embodiment
to the VME bus and complies with the full electrical and protocol - specifications as defined in the VME bus specifica
tion, revision Cl.
The VME interface operates in slave mode when the
VME host is loading up microcode, accessing control or status
registers, accessing the VME Interface Memory (VIM) or ac
cessing the data FIFO. The slave interface does not support
byte or word accesses; it supports only 32 bit parallel ac
cesses. However, the control and status registers are 16 bits
wide, and therefore a 16 bit host can still control the sub
system of the preferred embodiment.
The VME interface operates in master mode when it is
transferring data between the data FIFO and VME memory
under local DMA control. The DMA activity is controlled and monitored by the data transfer processor module 120 which can also initiate interrupt cycles onto the VME bus.
The Data Pipe interface is designed to connect to a high-bandwidth backplane bus. (Physically, this can be configured simply using ribbon cable.) This bus provides a convenient mechanism for private inter-subsystem communication. That is, the interface logic includes two receiving ports and one sending port, so that several busses of this type can be used as short local busses, to provide a wide variety of system dataflow architectures. The data transfers on this bus are buffered with FIFOs (at the receiving end), and thiss architecture allows high speed, low overhead transfers.
Multiple subsystems can be connected in parallel or in series
(e.g. in a pipeline), which allows very high performance
systems to be implemented easily.
As an example, a high performance, real time 3D
graphics system can be constructed with two accelerator
subsystems and a picture processor, configured in a pipeline.
The first accelerator subsystem transforms and clips the
polygons for frame n, the second accelerator sorts the poly
gons into drawing order (for hidden surface removal) for
frame n-l, and the picture processor draws the polygons for
frame n-2.
The DTP microcode expansion interface is virtually an
extension of the DTP module 120 micro address and data
busses. It is 100% compatible (physically and electrically)
with the GIP microcode expansion bus, and can use any of
the expansion cards, designed for GIP, that use this type of
interface. The external bulk memory systems and network
cards will connect to the subsystem of the preferred em
bodiment via this interface port.
A Picture Data Bus Interface 170 (or "GIP Interface")
connects to another bus which is particularly optimized for
graphics and image data. This interface also permits con
nection to the GIP microcode expansion bus, which allows a small amount of interface logic on the subsystem of the preferred embodiment to be controlled by the GIP microcode. This provides a bidirectional, 16 bit wide FIFO between the GIP and subsystem of the preferred embodiment along which commands and data can travel. Each side of the interface can interrupt the other.
Control Processor (CP) Module 110
The control processor is a 32 bit microcoded processor based around a 32 bit Integer Processor Unit (IPU) 240, which in the presently preferred embodiment is a Weitek
XL8137. The IPU 240 is supported by a 16 bit address generator (AG) 230 (which in the presently preferred embodiment is an Analog Devices ADSP 1410), and a 16 bit sequencer 210 (which in the presently preferred embodiment is an Analog Devices ADSP 1401). The main data path within the control processor is the CD bus 112.
Figure 2A provides a general overview of the organization of a control processor 110, in the. prfsently preferred embodiment. A writable control store (WCS) 220 is a memory which contains a sequence of microinstructions. A sequencer 210 provides microinstruction address commands 211 to fetch microinstructions from control store 220. The stream of instructions thus fetched from control store 220 is shown as 221. Note that both an unregistered output and an output registered through register 222 are preferably provided. The registered output from 222 is provided to decoder 260. Registers 222 and 223 are both configured as serial shadow registers, and interface to a serial loop 225. Note also that a portion of the microaddress stream is also preferably provided on a line 211A, which will be communicated to the floating point module 130.This has advantages which will be discussed below.
Note also that the flow on line 221 is preferably bidirectional. That is, this line can not only be used to read out microinstructions from the writable control store, but can also be used, under some circumstances, to write instructions back into the control store 220. This is an important capability, which has advantages which will be discussed below.
The microcode output 221 is provided as an input to decoder 260. In conventional fashion, this decoder separates the fields of a microinstruction and decodes them as needed, with minimal low level decode logic. The presently preferred microinstruction format is shown in Figure 2B, and will be discussed in greater detail below. The outputs 261 of the decoder 260 are routed to all of the major functional blocks, including the address generator 230, the integer processing unit 240 and the sequencer 210. Because these lines are so pervasive, they are not separately shown.
Note that the sequencer 210 receives inputs not only from the IPU 240 through link register (transceiver) 214, and from address generator 230 via sequencer local bus 215, but also receives several other inputs:
A variety of interrupt lines are multiplexed through a multiplexer 213, and these interrupts will generate the various alterations in the program counter operation of a sequencer 210. Sequencer hardware for handling interrupts appropriately is very well known.
Another multiplexer (shown as 212) is used to select among a variety of condition code signals, for input into sequencer 210. These condition code signals are - used in the logic of the sequencer 210 in various ways, as will be further - discussed below.
- A buffer 217 is used to route constants which may have been specified by a field of the microinstructions 221.
In -addition, some further inputs and outputs are shown to the writable control store 220 and microinstruction bus 221. A write enable line 224 is externally controlled, e.g.
from a host. In addition, a two-way interface 211B permits the host to write or read to the microaddress bus 211. This capability is useful for diagnostics, and also for writing microinstructions into the control store 220, as will be dis
cussed below.
A clock generator 250 receives cycle-duration inputs
from both the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor 120. The duration of the current clock cycle is selected on the fly, in accordance with the longest duration specifier received from the CP and DTP modules. This is preferably implemented using a programmed logic array (PAL). As with decoder 260, the outputs of the clock generator 250 are so pervasively routed that they are generally not separately shown.
Figure 2B shows the microinstruction field allocation, in the presently preferred embodiment. Note that the allocation of fields in the CP extension logic is also shown. The operation of this extension logic will be discussed in great detail below. However, at this point it should be noted that the additional bits of microinstruction format in this extension field, and the WCS extension which stores these additional fields for each instruction in the primary W#CS 220, and the logic which decodes and executes these additional microinstruction fields, are all replicated for each numeric processing module 130 or algorithm accelerator in the subsystem. Thus, the embodiment of Figure 10 would include three WCS extensions, and the total CP microcode field would be 192 bits.
Note that separate instruction fields in the primary instruction are allocated for the integer processing unit 240 (32 bits), for the address generator 230 (10 bits), and also for the sequencer 210 (7 bits). In the extension fields (which would be stored in each WCS extension), fields are allocated for register select, condition select, and transfer control. The use of these bits will be discussed in greater detail below.
Other instruction fields are allocated in ways which are fairly conventional in the art of microcoded architectures.
For example, a bit is used to indicate that a breakpoint has been reached, several bits are used to briefly describe the instruction type, two bits are used to encode the clock control (to permit the variable-duration clocks, as discussed
above), etc.
The address generator 230 is an off-the-shelf address
generator unit. The calculations which can be performed by
this unit enhance the rapid address computation abilities of
the control processor 110.
In addition, the integer processing unit (IPU) 240 pro
vides still greater arithmetic capability. The IPU can read
and write from the CD bus 122, and can also output ad
dresses onto the CA bus 111 (through the register 241).
These addresses, as may be seen in the high level diagram of
Figure 1, provide address information to the cache memory
140, #and also to the command memory 120.
The -actual component used for the integer processing
unit 240, in the presently preferred embodiment, has sig
nificant arithmetic capability, including the capability to do
multipl#ies in hardware. Thus, units 230 and 240 together
provide a large amount of arithmetic hardware available for
the purpose of address generation. In addition, of course, the
sequencer 210 includes some logic which also performs the
function of microinstruction address generation.
Note that the address generator 230 has an output
231, which is buffered and connected back onto the CD bus
112. The sequencer 210 can read the outputs of integer processing unit 240 (t#hrough link register 214), but the IPU 240
can also be commanded to drive the CD bus 112. The cache
memory 140, the FP module 130, or the command memory
190 can also access these results, once they are put out on
this bus.
Register 203 (shown at the top left of Figure 2A) stores
several little-used control signals. These include signals for
diagnostics, LED control signals, etc.
Integer Processor Unit fIPU) 240
The IPU 240 contains a 4 port register file 1110, an
ALU 1120, a field merge unit 1130, and a multiply/divide
unit 1140. A simplified diagram showing these components is shown in Figure 11. The two external data paths are shown in this figure as the D and AD buses 1101 and 1102.
In the control processor module 110, the AD bus 1102 is connected through register 241 to serve as the address bus to the various memories, and the D bus 1101 connects directly to the CD bus 112.
The IPU 240's four port register file 1110 allows, in a single #cycle, such operations as rl = r2 + r3, in addition to a write into the register file via the fourth port. The ALU 1120 provides all the usual arithmetic and logical operations, as well as priority' #encoding and bit Qr byte reversal ins#tructions. The field merge unit 1130 provides multi-bit shifts and rotates, variable bit field extract,- deposit and merge functions The multiply/divide unit 1140 -runs separate from the rest of the IPU 240: once it has started doing a multiply or divide operation, any other non- multiply/divide instructions can be executed by the ALU 1120 or field merge unit 1130. The multiply operation is 32 by 32 signed (8 cycles), and the divide operation is 64 over 32 bits unsigned (20 cycles).
Register 241, external to the IPU 240, is used at the interface to the CA #bus 111. This introduces a pipeline delay when accessing memory. (This register is necessary because, with the specific part used here, the AD bus is not valid until 75-90 ns after the start of a cycle.)
The microcode instruction input to the IPU 240 (on a "C" bus 1103) is registered internally (in a register 1151), so the microcode instruction is taken directly from the writable control store (WCS).
Address generator (AG) 230
The configuration of the address generator 230 used in the preferred embodiment is generally shown in Figure 12.
Key elements include a 16 bit wide ALU 1210, 30 internal registers (functionally grouped as 16 address registers 1222, 4 offset registers 1224, 4 compare registers 1226, and 4 initialization registers 1228. Also included are an address comparator 1230 and bit reverser 1240. An internal bus 1250 provides data routing, and a "Y" bus 1270 provides address outputs 231 which are fed back onto CD bus 112 (when output buffer 232 is enabled). The "D" bus 1260 is connected to provide inputs or outputs to the sequencer data bus 215, which is separated from the CD bus 112 by link regis ter/i?ansceiver 214. The actual device also includes an instruction decoder and miscellaneous timing and glue logic, not shown.
These features allow the address generator 230, in a single cycle, to:
output a 16 bit address,
modify this memory address by adding (or subtracting) an offset to it,
detect when the address value has moved to or beyond a pre-set boundary, and conditionally re-initialize the address value.
This latter step is particularly useful for implementing circular buffers or modulo addressing.
The address generator 230 augments the address generating capabilities of the IPU 240. However, the particular chip used for the address generator 230 can only generate 16 bit addresses, if operating.directly. (Double precision addresses would take two cycles, or two chips can be cascaded.) In the presently preferred embodiment, the 16-bit address outputs of the address generator 230 are passed through the IPU 240, where they can be added to a base address and extended up to 32 bits.
The address generator's registers are accessed via its 16 bit wide D port, which is connected to the same local portion 215 and link register 214 as the sequencer.
The addresses come out of the Y port 1270 (shown as line 231 in Figure 2A). The addresses are passed through a three-state buffer 232 before connecting to the CD bus 112.
When either the address generator's D or Y port is read (i.e.
is called on to drive the CD bus) the 16 bit values can be zero extended or sign extended to the bus width (32 bits). The logic which performs this is located in sign/zero extend PAL 216, which is discussed in greater detail below. Zero extension or sign extension is controlled directly from the CP microcode. (This feature is available when any of the 16 bit wide ports are selected to drive the CD bus.)
The instruction set of the address generator 230 is divided into the following groups:
Looping,
Register transfers,
Logical and shift operations,
Control operations, and
Miscellaneous operations.
The microcode instruction input to the address generator is registered internally, so the microcode instruction is taken directly from the WCS 220.
Sequencer 210
In the presently preferred embodiment, sequencer 210 employs an ADSP 1401. Key elements of this particular implementation are shown in Figure 13. These include a 16 bit adder 1310, a 64 x 16 bit RAM 1320, interrupt logic 1330, interrupt vector storage 1340, and four loop counters.
The internal RAM 1320 can be used in three ways:
As a register stack: This allows up to four addresses to be saved on the stack when entering a subroutine.
These can then be accessed by a 2 bit field in the relevant instructions.
As a subroutine stack: This provides the normal return address storage for subroutine linkage and interrupts. It can also be used to save other parameters such as the status register or counters.
For indirect address storage: This allows an area to be set aside to hold often used addresses. These are accessed using the least significant 6 bits of the D port.
Stack limit registers 1321 protect against one stack area corrupting another, or stack overflow and underflow situations. If one of these occurs then an internal interrupt is generated, so an error condition can be flagged or the stack extended off-chip (stack paging).
Ten prioritized interrupts are catered for - two internal to the device, for stack errors and counter underflow, and eight external. All the interrupt detection, registering and masking is handled on-chip by logic 1330, and the corresponding vector is fetched from the interrupt vector file 1340.
The instruction set is very comprehensive with a wide variety of jumps, subroutine calls, and returns. Most of these instructions can use absolute addresses, relative addresses, or indirect addresses to specify the target address. They can also be qualified by one of the selected conditions:
Unconditional. Execute the instruction always.
Not flag. If the condition code input (called FLAG) is false then execute the instruction, otherwise continue (the usual fail instruction).
Flag. If the condition code input is true then execute the instruction, otherwise continue (the usual fail in struction) Sign. Execution of the instruction depends on the sign bit in the status register.
There are also instructions to do stack management, status register operations, counter operations and interrupt control.
The microcode instruction input is registered internally, so the microcode instruction is taken directly from the
WCS (unregistered).
Sequencer support logic
The sequencer support logic falls into four categories: interrupts, conditional code selection, micro address bus, and constant/next address field.
Interrupts
The chip used for sequencer 210, in the presently preferred embodiment, only has four interrupt input pins.
Therefore an external multiplexer 213 is used to extend the number of available interrupts to eight. The interrupts are mainly used for communication and to support debugging tools.
The interrupt sources are (in order of highest priority first):
Claw logic
Within the debug environment there are, nominally, two tasks running: the monitor task and the user task. The claw logic allows the user task to be single stepped without single stepping the monitor task as well. The claw logic "claws back control" to the monitor task after one instruction in the user task has been run. The instruction that returns control back to the user task requests a claw interrupt. Since this is delayed by one cycle, the interrupt occurs on the first instruction executed in the user's task. Thus control is returned back to the monitor task before the next (i.e. the second) instruction in the user task is executed.
Breakpoint
This interrupt level is connected directly to a microcode bit, so that whenever this bit is set an interrupt will occur. This provides a convenient mechanism for implementing breakpoints. The instruction with the breakpoint bit set will be executed, and then control passed to the breakpoint handler. Any number of breakpoints can be set.
VME bus
The VME bus interrupt is normally used only for supporting the debug monitor and should not be used during normal operation.
Floating point processor (breakpoint)
When the floating-point processor module 130 hits one of the breakpoints set in its WCS, the FP clocks are stopped.
The FP module notifies the control processor module 110 of its situation via this interrupt. *
DTP memorv access
This interrupt is used to force the control processor module 110 to temporarily suspend accesses to the data cache memory. This permits the data transfer processor module 120 to gain access to cache 140.
DTP (command)
-This interrupt is the normal method for the data
transfer processor to inform the control processor module
110 that there is a command in the cp~command FIFO (in
command memory 190). **
DTP (data transfer done)
This interrupt is used by the data transfer processor
module 120 to inform the control processor module 110 that
a data transfer request has been finished. **
- Floating point processor (general)
This interrupt can be generated as a result of the CP
WAIT, FPWAIT changing state, or the occurrence of an error
(whose type can be defined in software), or a breakpoint in
the floating-point processor module 130. The active events
are selected by a mask register, on the FP module 130,
which the control processor module 110 can load. This inter
rupt is not used at present, and is reserved for future use.In
systems using multiple FP modules 130, the four FPs will
share this interrupt. The interrupt service routine will
therefore need to identify which FP(s) caused the interrupt,
in order to service them accordingly. *
Note: The interrupts marked with * can also be tested by the normal condition code logic, so that if it is more convenient for them to be polled then they can be.
For the interrupts marked **, the situation that generates the interrupt condition can be detected by examining the control information in the software FIFO data structures.
This can be polled if interrupts are not used.
The use of multiplexer 213 to expand the number of interrupts forces different timing requirements between the four high priority interrupt levels and the four low priority interrupts. For the four highest priority interrupts to be recognized, they must occur 25 ns before the rising edge of the microcode clock. For the lower priority interrupts, the time limit is 15 ns before the falling edge.
To generate an interrupt, the corresponding interrupt input is held high for one clock period. No hardware- interrupt acknowledge cycle is necessary, so the interrupt generating hardware is very simple.
Condition code logic
The sequencer ha#s a single condition code input called
FLAG, and all of t#he testable status signals are multiplexed into this pin. This is registered internalty, and has a normal
set up time of 10 ns when IRO is masked (counter underflow interrupt), or 26 ns when enabled. The polarity of the FLAG input~ can be changed inside the sequencer.
As seen in Figure 40A, some additional logic is prefer
ably used to preserve the state of the FLAG inputs outside
the sequencer 210. This permits the internal state of the se
quencer 210 to be fully restored after an interrupt.
A PAL 4021 is used to emulate the internal flip-flop
4020, inside the sequencer 210 (or 310). This PAL is thus
operated simply as a "mimic register." The need for this can
arise under conditions as shown in Figure 40B.
When an interrupt occurs, the sequencer will divert to an interrupt handling routine. During this routine the mimic register PAL simply holds a copy of the status flag condition which existed before the interrupt. At the end of the interrupt handling routine, the multiplexer 212 is commanded to provide the output of the PAL 4021 as the FLAG input to sequencer 210. This restores the internal state of flip-flop 4020. This permits instruction flow to continue in the same sequence it would have if the interrupt had not occurred.
This is particularly important if the instruction following the interrupt is a conditional branch. Correct restoration of the internal state assures that the conditional branch will be correctly executed.
Of course, this logic would not be necessary with some
sequencers. However, it is advantageous with the particular
sequencer used in the presently preferred embodiment.
The testable status signals are:
IPU 240 condition code output: this relays the
status of the current instruction. Which condition is indi
cated by the IPU output on this pin is defined by the mi
crocode instruction.
Microcode loop: This is a status bit in the. VME
interface control register and is useful for diagnostic soft
ware.
Write flags 0 and 1: These two signals allow
better access to the internal state of the data cache memory
write logic and are only used by the state save and restore
microcode in the debug monitor.
Held status: This is tested when returning from
an interrupt, so that any conditional jump, etc., is executed
correctly even if it was displaced by a jump to the interrupt
service routine.
FP status signal CPWAIT: This is cleared when
the FP has finished its calculations and is waiting for more
data.
FP status signal FPWAIT: This is cleared when the control processor module 110 has finished its calculations and is waiting for more data.
FP status signal bank~select: This indicates which half of the FP register file is allocated to the control processor module 110, when the register files are used in the double buffered (logical) mode.
FP status signal: Serial loop. This is extracted from- the end of the serial loop that runs through the floating point chips on the FP. The interfaces to this serial loop allow the control processor module 110 to extract (and insert) the internal status of these devices.
FP status signals: cp~wait interrupt and fp#waiUinterrupt. These two status bits are set (if masking permits) whenever their respective signals have gone from high to low. The signals FPWAIT and CPWAIT are directly tested, since they might return high again before the CP can identify the interrupt source.
FP status signal: fp#breakpoint. This is only used for debugging, and is set whenever the FP hits a breakpoint.
FP - status signal: fp#error. This is set whenever an - error occurs in the floating-point processor module 130.
It has been included for future use.
The FP status signals share a common line into the sequencer, and the actual one to be tested is selected by the portion of CP extension microcode,
The condition output from the IPU 240 is valid too late to meet the sequencer's set up time (especially as it will be delayed by a multiplexer), when cycling in 100 ns. When testing this condition the clock will need to be stretched to 125 ns.
Implementing "for loops" is best done by using one of the counters internal to the sequencer, thus freeing the IPU 240 for address calculations. For-loops could be done using the IPU 240, but this would impose extra overhead due to a longer cycle time.
The condition codes are multiplexed via an 8 to 1 multiplexer 212 into the "FLAG" input in the sequencer. The sequencer internally registers and selects the polarity of the selected condition code signal.
Micro-address bus The micro-#address bus 211 and 211A can be driven from two sources: from the sequencer 210 during normal program execution, and from the VME bus when loading mi
crocode. The VME bus can also read the contents of the mi
cro-address bus to see what address the sequencer is at.
This is done asynchronously to the sequencer operation, and
is mainly used for diagnostics.
The micro-address bus 211 is also routed onto the FP
module (shown as extension 2jim) because 32 bits of the
control processor module 110 WCS is located on each FP
module. The micro address bus extension 211A can also be
used to drive the FP WCS. This capability can be useful for
two reasons:
1) As a means for the host to provide an address
when the. FP microcode is down loaded.
2) As a;mechanism which could be used for run
ning the FP microcode synchronously with the #control pro
cessor module 110, so that the address of the sequencer 210
in the control processor module 110 is used rather than the
internally generated one. (This capability is n ot present in
the principal preferred embodiment, but is noted as a read
ily available alternative.)
Constant field
The 16 bit wide constant field of the microinstruction
is mainly used to provide addresses to the sequencer, but
can also hold constants for the address generator.
The sequencer 210 has a bidirectional connection to a private local bus (the sequencer data bus 215). This permits jumps, etc.. to be done in parallel with actions using the CD bus 112. The sequencer data bus is linked to the CD bus 112 via a bidirectional link register/transceiver 214. The timing of the clocks and the "feed through" control to the link register 214 are varied, depending on the transfer path and direction, because the source and destinations all have different requirements. Note that the address generator data input 1260 is connected to the sequencer side of this interface, because the address generator 230 has the same timing requirements as the sequencer for transfers on this bus.
This configuration allows the following routings:
Constant field - > Sequencer (Jumps)
Constant field - > CD bus (Register loading)
Sequencer - > CD bus (Diagnostics)
CD bus - > Sequencer (Computed Jumps)
Constant field - > Address generator
Address Generator- > CD bus (Diagnostics)
CD bus - > Address Generator (Computed addresses) .
Writable Control Store (WCS) 220
In the presently preferred embodiment, the WCS memory bank - uses microcode# SIL modules. These provide 8K by 32 bits of memory, together with serial shadow registers 2#22 and 223 for loading microcode and for diagnostics.
(The operation of these shadow registers will be discussed in much greater detail below.) Two versions of the module are used: registered or non-registered outputs. The IPU 240, and address generator 230, and sequencer 210 have their own internal pipeline registers, and so use the non-registered outputs from WCS 220.
It should be noted that the control processor module's
WCS is actually distributed. In addition to the primary WCS portion 220 shown (which is physically located on the base board), there are also one or more other extensions of WCS 220. These extensions 490 receive the microaddress stream 211A, and physically reside on each FP module. The instruction set stored in the primary WCS 220 contains 96 bits of instruction at each address. The WCS extensions 490 each span the same range of addresses as the primary WCS 220, but each of the WCS extensions (in each of the numeric processor modules 130) contains an additional 32 bits of instruction at each address.
WCS Interface Registers 222 and 223
The operation of the serial loop by which the host (working through the VME Interface 160) can read from and write to all of the control stores will be discussed in detail below. At this point, hardware structure and connections will be described.
As noted, register 222 provides a registered microinstruction output, to the decoder 260 and to many other logic and memory components. An unregistered microinstruction output 221 is also provided, for components which have internal instruction registering. (For example, the IPU 240 has internal instruction pipeline registers. It also has sophisticated internal decode logic. Note that the IPU 240 also receives some registered control bits from the decoder 260, ç.g. output enable #signals.)
The register 222 is actually a serial shadow register. It not only provides a registered parallel throughput, but also has a serial access mode. The serial access mode is used for interface to the serial loop described below.
The other serial shadow register 223 shadows the unregistered outputs 221. To provide a serial output (when demanded) which corresponds to the complete instruction 221 (or, conversely, to write the full width of an instruction 221 back into the control store 220), all bit fields must be accessed.
Of course, the connections just described provide only a data interface to the WCS 220. That is, the registers 222 and 223 see the content of locations in WCS 220, but do not see addresses explicitly associated with the data. The address interface is a separate two-way interface, which is shown as a bidirectional connection 211B. This is the CP microaddress bus, which is connected to the microcode load control logic 610 in the VME Interface. This same bus provides the microaddress interface to all of the control stores in the system, except for the DTP control store. The microaddress line in the# DTP control store is connected to another register/buffer pair in the VME Interface.
FP control logic
An important feature of the architecture is that the control processor module 110 is not merely a supervisory processor, but directly controls all data transfers to and from the floating-point processor module 130. Most of this logic is physically on the FP module, but is controlled by the microcode of the control processor module 110, and interfaces to the CD bus. This logic is discussed in much greater detail below, where the data operations of the FP module are reviewed.
Miscellaneous logic
Mode registers 203
The mode registers 203 hold the value of little used control signals which can not justify dedicated microcode bits. The mode bits are:
Flow through or register control of the read holding registers 561.
Flow through or register control of the write holding registers 561 (the registers shown as 561 in Figure 5 are actually doubled, and include one read register and one write register)..
Loopback mode for the holding registers 560.
Two LED control signals.
Module select (3 bits): this address selects among
the multiple possible FP modules 130 and/or algorithm ac
celerators 130'.
CD bus decode logic
One of the functions of decoder 260 is to decode the
microcode CD source field to control the output enables of
devices that can drive the CD bus. It also decodes the CD
destination fieId- to generate clock strobe and write enable
signals (which are qualified by write gate signal from the
clock generator).Most of- the ports on the CD bus can be read
and written, so mimic registers in the IPU 240 are not re
quired. (Note that some of the CD sources and destinations
will be controlled by decode logic in the CP Extension Logic
410, rather than by that in the decoder 260.)
Possible CD bus sources and destinations include:
IPU 240
Command memory Data cache memory holding registers 560A
Mode register (8 bits)
Transfer control register * **
FP control register * $* Start address register * **
Instruction register (8 bits) *
Status register (source only) *
Address generator address port **
Address generator data port **
Sequencer data port **
Constant / next address field (source only) **
* These registers are part of the CP Extension
Logic 410, which is located on the FP module.These registers are selected by fields in the extended CP microcode, which is stored in the WCS extension 490. Only the selected mod ule(s) respond to the data transfer, and source or sink the data.
** These sources only drive the lower 16 bits.
When one of them is selected, the sign/zero extend PAL 216 is also activated, so that the data is either sign or zero extended up to the bus width of 32 bits.
Note that only one source and one destination can be selected, and that they must be different. The transfer of data into the IPU 240 is under control of the IPU 240's instruction field, so that it can take data from the CD bus at the same time it is being loaded into another destination.
Clock generator 250
The clock generator 250 produces the basic clock signals used throughout the control processor module 110 (and the data transfer processor module 120). It receives cycleduration inputs from both the control processor 110 and the data transfer processor 120. The duration of the current clock cycle is selected on the fly, in accordance with the longer duration of the two received from the CP and DTP modules.
This generator is preferably i#mplemented using a programmed logic array (PAL). This PAL generates one of four predefined waveform sequences. These four sequences have different periods, namely 4, 5, 6, and 7 times the input clock period. This translates to 100, 125, 150 and 175 ns, when a 40 MHz oscillator is used, as presently preferred.
Four clock outputs are produced. All of these clocks.
except the time-two clock, will have the same duration, depending on the cycle-duration inputs. These include a microcode clock, a pipeline clock, a write-enable gate signal, and a times-two clock.
The microcode clock is always high for 2 cycles (of the oscillator), and then is low for 2, 3, 4 or 5 cycles, as selected by the cycle length inputs. The microcode clock keeps the sequencer, integer processor unit address generator, registers, etc. running synchronously.
The pipeline clock has the same waveform as the microcode clock, but the microcode clock can be disabled, leaving the pipeline clock running, for microcode loading.
The write-enable gate signal goes low one cycle after the microcode clock goes high, but returns high 1 cycle be#fore the microcode clock does. This signal provides the timing for write enables for all of the memories and some of the registers.
The times-two clock runs at twice the frequency the microcode clock does, and its rising edge occurs at the same time as a the microcode clock edge. This is a special clock, which is used only by the Integer Processor Units 240 and 340. The IPUs use this clock to clock their (internal) multiply/divide logic, -in order to reduce the time taken for these multi-cycle functions.
The cycle length of the clocks are adjusted for each instruction, so that the time allocated to that instruction is the minimum required by the data path routing specified in the instruction. The cycle duration for each instruction is preferably calculated by the microcode assembler, and is included as part of the instruction. This gives an increase in performance over the case where a fixed cycle length is used, in which case all instructions would have to take as long the slowest instruction. In the presently preferred embodiment four cycle lengths are supported, of 100, 125, 150 and 175 ns. However, most instructions will use the shortest cycle length.
The clock cycle can also be extended by a "wait signal."
This wait signal is used when memories cannot meet the normal access time, e.g. because they are busy, or because they are off-board and their access times must be extended due to the additional buffering. For example, the VME interface memory, which is dual ported, may suffer a clash on addresses and require one port to wait. The data cache memory 140 can be expanded (as shown in Figure 43) with a cache memory expansion module, mounted on a memory board which uses the same connectors as the FP module.
However, depending on the memory type used, accesses to the cache expansion module may be slower than accesses to the primary cache 140. In such cases the wait-state input to the clock generator will permit the cycle length will be automatically extended.This facility will allow much slower, and# hence cheaper, memory to be used on the expansion module 4310, with only modest degradation in performance.
The host can control the clock generator via the VME bus interface. The host can thereby select whether the clock generator 250 free runs or is stopped. In the stopped condition, the host can single step the clocks. Note that both the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120 will be single stepped together.
The final control into the clock generator is one that
inhibits all the clocks except the pipeline clock (which be
haves normally). This is used when loading (or reading)
WCS, as it allows these actions to occur without disturbing
the internal state of the control processor module 110 or
data transfer processor module 120; For example, this would
be used when a breakpoint is set in WCS during a microcode
debugging session.
Debug hardware
Most of the debug hardware included in the control
processor module 110 has already been mentioned in vari
ous places above. Key features are summarized here for
convenience:
The host can take control of the microaddress
bus 211, both for read and for write.
The host can load and readback the WCS 220.
The control processor module 110 recognizes a
VME generated interrupt (i.e. an interrupt from the host) as
a high priority interrupt.
Hardware breakpoint support is provided, with
no restriction on the number of breakpoints that are set at
any one time.
Claw logic is provided, so a user task can be sin
gle stepped without single stepping the monitor task.
All registers are read/write, permitting many normal data flows to be reversed for diagnostics.
A clock control input permits single stepping mi
crocode.
- All interrupts can be selectively enabled or dis
abled.
The internal state of the critical logic groups can
be accessed. This allows a complete state save and restore of
the control processor module 110 hardware.
Microcode word format
Figure 2B shows schematically the organization of the
microinstructions stored in WCS 220 and in the WCS exten
sion(s) located on the FP module(s). The items marked with
a * come directly from the WCS, and are pipelined internally
in the devices they are controlling. The other items are reg
istered at the output of the WCS 220.
The fields marked ** are physically stored in the WCS
extension on the FP module, but are part of the CP microcode
word. Most of these microcode actions are qualified by the
module selection logic, and will have no effect if the FP
module hasn't been selected.
The total number of microcode bits available are 96
plus an extra 32 per FP module installed. Most of the bits
are used, but there are also a few spare bits available.
IPU opcode (32) * This field controls the data
routing and arithmetic or logical operation of the IPU 240 integer processor. The allocation of bits within the field is encoded. All instructions are encoded in the bottom 24 bits.
The top 8 bits are only used during the transfer of data into the IPU 240's register file. (Further details of this field may be found in the manufacturer's data sheets for the IPU.)
Sequencer opcode (7) * This field controls the generation of the next address by the ADSP 1401. (Further details of this field may be found in the manufacturer's data sheets for that part.)
Constant / next address field (16) * This field is mainly used for providing address information to the sequencer, but can also be used to place a 16 bit constant value onto the data bus. This can then be loaded into any of the registers on this bus.
Address generator opcode (10) * This field controls the ADSP 1410 address generator. (Further details of this field may be found in the manufacturer's data sheets for that part.)
Cvcle length (2) This field selec#ts the cycle length appropriate to the instruction and data routing selected.
Data cache access (1) * This bit is active whenever an access to the data cache memory is required by the control processor module 110 for its own use or to transfer data to or from the FP. The access flag is not pipelined so that the arbitration with the data transfer processor module 120 data cache requests can be sorted out before the start of the cycle the request happens on.
Data cache write enable (1) This bit generates a write cycle in the data cache memory.
Data cache write all (1) This bit overrides the normal write enable gating that allows selective updating of words in the data cache memory and forces them all to be written. This is useful when setting blocks of memory to a constant value.
Data cache - port select (1) This bit selects either
the FP module holding registers or the control processor
module 110 holding registers to be the source or destination
for a data cache transfer.
Data cache memory length (3) These bits specify
the number of words from the FP holding register to write
into the data cache memory. The first word in the holding
register is specified by the least significant three bits of the
data cache memory address.
Condition code select (3) This field selects one of
the following condition codes to be tested by the sequencer
during a conditional instruction:
IPU 240 condition code output
fp~status (actual status selected by a separate field) fp#breakpoint microcode loop
write flags (2 entries)
hold status
CD bus source (3) This field selects one of the
following registers, buffers or devices to drive the CD bus: :
IPU 240
Command memory 190 One of the Data cache memory holding registers 561* * Mode register
FP module* - Address generator address port
Address generator data port
Sequencer data port
Constant / next address field (* Note that the particular register or buffer to use as the source is specified in another field.)
CD bus destination (3! This field selects one of the following registers, buffers or devices as the destination of the data on the CD bus:
Command memory
Data cache memory holding register
Mode register
FP module *
Address generator address port
Address generator data port
Sequencer data port
* Note that the particular module to use as the source is specified in another field.
The IPU 240 is not included because it can "grab" the data on the CD bus at any time. (This function is controlled by the IPU instruction field.)
Address register control (2) One of these control bits enables the loading of the address register and the other bit enables readback of the register for use by the diagnostics and debug monitor.
Module select (3i The most significant bit (broadcast select) controls how the other two bits (module
ID) are . interpreted. When broadcast select is 0 the module (ID) selects the single module which is to respond to a data transfer, either with the data cache memory or the CD bus.
When broadcast select is 1 the module ID selects which group of FPs (or algorithm accelerators) responds to a data transfer. This allows the same data to be transferred to multiple destinations at the same time and hence is faster than individual writes. Note that this is only valid for transfers to the modules, since multiple transfers from the modules could cause contention on the data bus.
Module select mode (1) Specifies whether the module to select is defined by the microcode module select field or by the mode register. This allows the module to be selected on a cycle by cycle basis or more globally. The global method is used when the work can be done on any of the FP modules present and the control processor module 110 picks the FP to use before it starts the transfer/calculate cycle. If the global facility wasn't available then there would be a different control processor module 110 routine to correspond to every FP module.
Breakpoint (1) (** Debug use only ** ) Set by the debug monitor to place a breakpoint on an instruction.
This causes an interrupt to occur during the instruction so that control is passed to the debug monitor microcode after this instruction has finished.
Claw (1) (** Debug use only **) Set to prime the claw logic when single stepping a user task. This causes an interrupt to occur during the next instruction so that control is passed back to the debug monitor microcode after one user task instruction has -been executed. This allows a user task- to be single stepped without physically switching the clocks on and off.
Interrupt DTP (1) This generates an interrupt in the data transfer processor module 120 to gets its attention.
The net result of this is to force the data transfer processor
module 120 to examine a command queue to find its next
item of work.
Zero or Sign extend (1) This only has any effect
when a 16 bit wide register or device is read. This signal
selects whether the data is zero extended (bits 16-31 set to
zero) or. sign extended (bits 16- 31 set to the same as bit
15).
Held Status (1) This bit prevents the updating of
the mimic status register that normally follows the state of
the FLAG register inside the sequencer 210. Normally this
mimic bit follows the internal register's state, but during an
interrupt service the mimic bit is prevented from being up
dated. This permits the FLAG register to be correctly re
stored when the interrupt routine is exited.
FP condition code select (3) ** These bits select
which one of the internal FP module signals drive the com
mon condition code line to the control processor module 110
sequencer. The following can be selected:
CPWAIT
FPWAIT bank~select serial loop cp#wait interrupt fp~wait~interrupt fp breakpoint fop~ error - Register select (3) ** These bits select which one of the# internal registers 444 on the FP module are to be read or written via the CD bus (bottom 16 bits only). The registers and buffers are:
Transfer control register
FP control register
Start address register
Instruction register (8 bits)
Status register (source only)
Register direction (1) ** This bit selects whether a register is to be read or written.
Clear FP breakpoint (1) ** This bit clears the FP breakpoint, which in turn allows the FP clocks# to run.
Jump start address (1) ** This bit causes the FP sequencer to use the start address register 479 (loaded by the control processor module 110) as the address to the next instruction to execute. This is a "one shot" action, so after the
FP has executed the instruction at the start address the FP sequencer reverts back to its normal mode of operation.
Transfer Control (20) ** This field controls the transfer of data between the holding registers 420 (on the
FP module) and the FP module's fast register files 430. Only a brief description of each sub-field is included here, because their use will only become apparent once the overall transfer mechanisms have been explored.
Direction (1) This bit determines the transfer direction between the holding registers 420 and the register file 430. The direction is either holding register to register file or register file to holding register.
Transfer enable (1) This bit starts a transfer cycle, as defined by the other microcode bits and the registered control bits (in the transfer control register).
Register file address (6) The address specified here is the address of the first word in the register file that data is read from or written to.
Register file address modifiers (2) These specify how the register file address is to be modified to implement physical, - logical or preview mode of addressing which are all concerned with how the register file is shared between the control processor module 110 and FP.
Holding register start address (3) This
specifies the first holding register to use in a transfer.
Molding register start address mode (2) The
holding register start address can be specified to come from
one of three sources:
1. From the CP microcode field mentioned in the previous
paragraph;
2. From a field held in the FP module's transfer register; or
3. From the least significant 3 bits of the address used in the
last CP access to cache.
Handshake mode (3) The handshake mode
controls the handshaking between the control processor
module 110 and FP via the FPWAIT and CPWAIT mecha
nism, and the bank selection. Several of the modes override
the normal handshaking procedures, so the main signals can
be initialized or set for debugging purposes. The modes are:
set CPDONE
request register file swap
set CPDONTE and request swap
clear CPDONE
test mode (used only for diagnostics)
no operation
Double write enable (1) The double write enable forces two words to be transferred into the register file instead of the one that the length or start parameters are requesting. This ensures that the valid data is tagged with its data valid flag asserted and that the invalid data is tagged with its its valid data flag disasserted.These flags are tested by the FP to identify which data items are valid.
Clock all holding registers
This bit overrides the normal holding register clock seque#n#cing #when transferring data from the register files into the holding'registers. When active this bit causes all registers to be clocked together rather than sequentially which quadruplicates the register file data into all holding registers.
Data Transfer Processor Module 120
A block diagram of the data transfer processor module
120 is shown in Figure 3. Note that it is very similar to the control processor module 110, except that the DTP module
120 does not include a separate- address generator like address generator 230. If the specialized features in each processor were not used, the same microcode (at source level) could in principle be run in both processors.
'The data transfer processor module 120 is a 32 bit mi crocoded- processor, based around a 32 bit Integer Processor
Unit# (IPU) 340 controlled by a 16 bit sequencer 310. The main data path within the data transfer proc#essor module 120 is the Transfer Data bus (TD bus) 122.
Many of the portions of DTP module 120, in this embodiment, are closely analogous to portions of the control processor module 110. In general, corresponding reference numerals have been used to indicate such similarity. Thus, a sequencer 310 provides a sequence of microinstruction addresses 311 to a writable control store 320. The sequencer 310 not only interfaces with the TD bus 122 through register 314, but also receives con#dition codes through a .multiplexer 312, and receives interrupts through multiplexer 313. The microinstructions a#ccessed from control store 32b are provided as outputs 321, and a registered output is also provided through register 322.Lines 311B and 225 provide address and data interface from the host to this writable control store 320, as will be described below. (Line 324 is a write enable line, used in serial access.) Serial/parallel shift register 323 shadows the internal state of devices which receive unregistered inputs. A 16-bit sequencer bus 315 also provides 16-bit inputs to the sequencer 310. This input is a buffered input, which can be used, e.g., to input literal values.
The microinstructions 321 are provided as registered input to decode logic 360 (via shadow re#gister 322). The outputs 361 of this decode logic are provided as control inputs to the integer processing unit 340, the sequencer 310, and also to various of the interfaces 150, 160, and 170. In particular, the outputs of decode logic 360 control access to the TD bus 122. Note that the TD bus 122 provides a data interface to the external interfaces, and also to the cache memory 140. As with decoder 260, the outputs of decoder 360 a#re not separately shown, because they are so pervasive.
The integer processing unit 340 is preferably a Weitek
XL8137, as in the control processor. (However, note that no separate address generator is needed in the data transfer processor, since address generation is not so critical in this module.) The integer processing unit 340 has a two way interface to the TD bus 122, and can also provide address outputs, through register 341, onto the TA bus 121.
Control of data transfers
In order to achieve one transfer per cycle between a source port and a destination -port, several ..factors are catered for: - 1. Either the source or destination of the transfer may be FIFO buffered, and the transfer control must respond to the full and empty flags on the FIFO. The timing of these signals; in combination with the pipelining of the condition code input to the sequencer, will sometimes cause the transfer to overrun by one. For the transfers into a FIFO this is not a problem, because the half full flag is used. Use of the half full flag means that there is plenty of spare capacity in the FIFO to accept one or two words of overrun. When reading from the FIFO, other strategies must be used.The options of using FIFOs with "empty+1" flags, or delaying the
FIFO data in a pipeline stage, are not used in the presently preferred embodiment, due to their cost and space demands.
Two methods are provided to solve this possible
problem. Which of these methods is used depends on
whether the destination is a memory or a FIFO. The differ
ence is that a write operation can be undone on a memory,
but not on a FIFO. That is, if a data transfer from FIFO to
memory is continued for a word or two after the FIFO goes
empty, some erroneous data will be written into the mem
ory. However, this data can simply be overwritten as soon as góod data becomes available.
a. When reading a FIFO, the read signals
are logically modified by the FIFO empty signals. The result
of this is that, if an attempt is made to read an empty FIFO,
no read action is actually performed. This allows FIFO reads
to overrun without any consequences. The FIFOs protect
themselves from reads when they are empty, but this extra
control is necessary because the other side of the FIFO might
be written to during the overrun read, and this would lose
data. Thus, when the data transfer processor module 120 is
transferring data into a memory, it will stop when the FIFO
has gone empty. At this point an overrun will have occurred.
The DTP module 120 can then backtrack the address, so that,
when da#ta becomes available in the FIFO, the transfer
restarts as -if nothing had happened.
b. When writing into a FIFO, the write operation
cannot be undone. Therefore, a different method is used. The
microcode tests the status from the source FIFO (and obvi ously the destination FIFO) before every transfer. In this
mode, the transfer rate is much slower. However, if the
source FIFO ever gets more than half full, the microcode
switches to a fast transfer mode. The occurrence of this con
dition guarantees that up to half the source FIFO depth can
be read out without going past the empty mark. Therefore,
in this mode, the DTP module 120 can transfer a block of
this size without stopping to check the status. The status in
the receiving FIFO will still need checking, unless it is less than half full.This same technique of switching between slow and fast transfer modes can obviously be used with memories as well.
2. A three way branch instruction in the sequencer 310 (called BRANCH) provides a convenient way of keeping track of the number of words transferred and testing the FIFO status signals. This has the advantage of not using th#e IPU 340 in the conditional path, and thereby minimizes the cycle length.
3. For optimum data transfers to or from the data cache memory, the data interface to the TD bus 122 is buffered in a register bank 560B iseen in Figure 5), which contains eight 32 bit registers. This allows fully parallel reads and writes, as seen by the DCM. This gives a natural break in any long transfer ( > 8 floating-point words), because there is no double buffering in this path. The data transfer' processor module 120 will therefore be forced to suspend transfers until the memory cycle has occurred. This break will happen more frequently when contiguous transfers are not used and more memory access cycles are needed.
4. The a#rbitration of the data cache memory is decided at the beginning of the CP module's cycle. If the data transfer processor module 120 were running asynchronous to the control processor module 110 (to allow instruction dependent cycle time), the data transfer processor module
120 might have to wait up to 100 ns of synchronization time, and then another 100 ns of access time. (The access time could be much longer, because the control processor module 110 has priority, and the DTP module 120 must wait for a free memory cycle.) Moreover, the pipelining of the microcode instructions and FLAG input to the sequencer could introduce yet another delay, while the DTP module was looping to see if the transfer has been done.
To minimize these delays, the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120 share the same microcode clock generator. Both processors ask for their optimum cycle time, and the clock generator chooses the longest one. This should not greatly degrade the average speed of either processor, because the majority of instructions execute in the shortest cycle time. To overcome the delay when looping, the arbitration is done using non-registere#d microcode request bits.
One very minor drawback of this approach is that when the hardware single step is used it will affect both processors.
5. Thus, when a FIFO is either the source or the destination, the FIFO status signals (and, in some cases, the data .cache memory arbitration signals) will need to be monitored during a transfer. So that these four status signals
(FIFO full, FIFO half-full, FIFO empty, cache access granted)
can be monitored within a single cycle, the data transfer processor module 120 has multiway branch capability. This
inserts the status to be tested into the jump address, so that
the address that is jumped to depends on the status during
that cycle. The three FIFO status conditions are encoded into
two bits, and the arbitration signal makes up the third bit.
This provides an 8 way branch. When only the FIFO status is
of interest, the arbitration signal can be disabled, so the
multiway branch is reduced to 4 ways.
7. To avoid the data transfer processor module
120 being locked out of the - data cache memory 140 when
the control processor module 110 (or FP module 130) is us
ing it on every cycle, an interrupt has been provided. When
the data transfer processor module 120 is denied access, it
starts looping on the transfer acknowledge signal. A timeout
under this condition can easily be tested for. If a timeout oc
curs, then the data transfer processor module 120 can inter
rupt the control processor module 110. This will take the data transfer processor module 120 out of the memory access mode, and thus let the data transfer processor module 120 in.
Integer Processor Unit 340
The IPU 340, in the presently preferred embodiment, is essentially the same as the IPU 240 of the control processing module 110, which is extensively described above.
Sequencer
The sequencer 310, in the presently preferred embodiment, is essentially the same as the sequencer 210 of the control processing module 110, which is extensively described above.
Sequencer support logic
The sequencer support logic falls into 4 categories: interrupts, conditional code selection, micro address bus and constant I next address field.
Interrupts The sequencer only has 4 interrupt input pins. Therefore an external multiplexer 313 is used to extend the . number to 8. The interrupts are mainly used for communication
and to support debugging tools. -- - - The interrupt sources are (in order of highest priority
first):
Claw logic and Breakpoint: This interrupt
level is shared between the claw logic and the breakpoint
logic. The functions of these two interrupt types are
described above, in connection with the function of the se
quencer 210 in the control processor module 110.
VME bus (debug): The VME bus interrupt
is normally used only for supporting the debug monitor and
should not be used during normal operation.
VME bus (command): This interrupt level is set whenever a command is stored in the command register.
Control processor (command): This provides the normal method whereby the control processor module 110 can inform the data transfer processor module 120 that there is a command in the dtp#command FIFO. **
VME data FIFO: This interrupt level is used to notify the data transfer processor module 120 that the data FIFO in the VME interface needs attention because they have received some data (the input FIFO) or have run out of data (the output FIFO). *
GIP interface: The GIP interrupt is generated by the GIP FIFO status signals. * Data pipe interface: This interrupt level is used to notify the data transfer processor module 120
whenever one of the FIFOs in the data pipe interface needs
attention because they have received some data. *
Microcode expansion interface: This in
terrupt is reserved for use by any of the expansion cards
(e.g. bulk memory card or network). *
Note: The interrupts marked with T can
also be tested by the normal condition code logic, so that
they can be polled if that is preferred.
- For the interrupts marked **, the situation
that generates the interrupt condition can be detected by
examining the control information in the software FIFO data
structures. This can be polled if interrupts are not to be
used.
The use of multiplexer 313 to expand the number of
interrupts forces different timing requirements between the
four higher priority interrupt levels and the four low prior
ity interrupts. For the higher priority interrupts to be recog
nized, they must occur 25 ns before the rising edge of the microcode clock. For the lower priority interrupts, the deadline is 15 ns before the falling edge.
To generate an interrupt the corresponding interrupt input is held high for one clock period. No hardware interrupt acknowledge cycle is necessary, so the interrupting hardware is very simple.
Condition code logic
The sequencer has a single condition code input called
FLAG so all the testable status signals are multiplexed into this pin. This is registered internally and has the normal set up time of 10 ns when IRO is masked (counter underflow interrupt) or 26 ns when enabled. The polarity of the FLAG input can be changed inside the sequencer.
The DTP module, like the CP module, contains mimic register logic like that shown in Figure 40A. (This avoids problems with returning from interrupt handling.)
The testable status signals are:
IPU 340 condition code output (CONY): this signal relays the status of the current instruction. The specific condition that the IPU 340 outputs on this pin is coded in the microcode instruction.
Microcode loop. This is a status bit in the VME interface co#ntrol register, and is useful for diagnostic software.
FIFO status signals for the following FIFOs:
Data pipe input #1 half full and empty
Data pipe input #2 half full and empty
Data pipe output #1 full *
Data pipe output #2 full *
VME data input half full and empty
VME data output half full and empty
GIP interface (input) half full and empty
GIP interface (output) full, half full and empty
*These FIFO signals come from the receiving FIFOs on an
other subsystem.
Data cache memory cycle acknowledge; This indi
cates when the access to the data cache memory has been
granted.
Microcode expansion interface condition code signal. This is used by any microcode extension interface
180 to pass back status to the data transfer processor module's sequencer 310.
DMA bus error. This status bit goes active when the DMA transfer on the VME bus gets aborted as a result of a bus error occurring. The most likely reason for this error is that non-existent memory was addressed.
Write flags 0 and 1. These two signals allow better access to the internal state of the data cache memory write logic. They are only used by the state save and restore microcode in the debug monitor.
Held status: This is tested when returning from an interrupt, so that any conditional jump, etc., is executed correctly even if it was displaced by a jump to the interrupt service routine.
The COND output from the IPU 340 is valid too late to meet the sequencer's set up time (especially as it will be delayed by a multiplexer) when cycling in 100 ns. When testing this condition, the clock will need to be stretched to 125 ns.
Implementing "for loops" is best done by using one of the counters internal to the sequencer, thus freeing the IPU 340 for address calculations. Obviously they can be done using the IPU 340, but with the extra overhead of a longer cycle time.
The condition codes are multiplexed, via an 24 to 1 multiplexer 312, into the "FLAG" input in the sequencer 310.
The sequencer internally registers and selects the polarity of the selected condition code signal.
Microaddress Bus 311
The micro address bus 311 can be driven from two sources: from sequencer 310 during normal program execution, and from the VME bus when loading microcode. The
VME bus can also read the contents of the microaddress bus 311, to see what address the sequencer 310 is at. This is done asynchronously to the sequencer operation, and is mainly used for diagnostics. The extension of this bus, shown as line 311B, is connected to the Host Interface Logic 160.
Constant / next address field
This is used in a fashion quite different from that described above in connection with sequencer 210. In the DTP module 1-20, some innovative logic is used to provide an enhanced multiway branching capability. This logic (and its use in multiway branching) will now be described.
Multiway Branching
The embodiment shown in Figures 3A and 3B includes some significant new capabilities for multiway branching . in microcoded systems. Figure 30 schematically shows the microcode operation used in the presently preferred embodiment to provide multiway branching without address boundary constraints.
In Figure 3A, note that the constant/next address field
(from a microinstruction field) is not only provided to buffer
317, but is also provided as an input to multiway branch
logic 318. The multiway branch logic can manipulate this
signal in ways which provide a novel capability in mi
crocoded architectures. Other inputs to this multiway branch
logic include FIF status signals, and also a shift command
(which will be used to vary the increment between alterna
tive destinations, in the multiway branch step performed by
sequencer 310).
Figure 3B shows somewhat greater detail. The constant field (16 bits) from the microinstruction bus 311 is split, to provide inputs both to PAL 318 and buffer 317. A common enable signal is used to activate both of these, when multiway branch operation is desired. (Of course, the sequencer bus 315 has many other uses as well, and multiway branch operation will often not be desired.) Moreover, the constant/next address field is also used very often for simple jump operations, and in such cases the multiway branch logic 318 is disabled.
Figure 30 shows still greater detail regarding the internal operation of the multiway branch logic 318. A variety of condition and# status signals are provided to condition select/encode logic 3010. This selects and encodes these conditions to give a three bit signal -which can be used for branching.
The multiway branch logic is controlled by several microinstruction bits, as described in detail below.
It is particularly advantageous to use such multiway branching logic in a data transfer processor like module 120.
In this case, device condition signals can be used as the conditions input to select/encode logic 3010. This permits a data transfer processor to exercise high-level control over a quite complex interface. When a status signal of interest occurs, the multiway branch logic can very rapidly transfer to the appropriate routine for handling the condition. The multiway branch capability permits the sequencer to test the conditions of several devices in a single cycle. This means that the DTP module 120 can perform a data transfer on every cycle. This also permits sequencers having only a single condition code (FLAG) input to exercise complex control.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the inputs to select/encode logic 3010 include status bits from four FIFOs, as detailed below. However, of course, a wide variety of other input arrangements could be used.
Note that a shift input is provided to the shift and merge logic. This permits the increment between the destinations of the multiway branch to be varied.
The right side of Figure 30 shows schematically that the sequencer 310 has relative addressing capability. This capability, in combination with the multiway branch logic, means that address boundary constraints can be ignored.
This is particularly advantageous in a data transfer processor. Since such a processor must be able to perform a high fraction of data transfers, it may be desired to include a large fraction of multiway branch instructions. The lack of address boundary constraints means . that a high proportion of such instructions can be used.
The presently preferred embodiment uses the program counter as an input to the jump destination. This is different from many previous implementations of multiway branching, where the base destination address was supplied from a different source.
yWritable Control Store (ss7CSi 320
The WCS is made up using the microcode SIL modules.
These provide 8K by 32 bits of memory with a serial scan pipeline register for loading microcode and diagnostics. Two versions of the module are used: registered or non-registered outputs. The IPU 340 and sequencer 310 have their own internal pipeline registers and so use the non-registered versions.
WCS interface registers 322 and 323 function analogously to the WCS interface registers 223 and 222 described above with regard to the control processor module.
DMA controller
An important function of the DTP module 120 is controlling one or more DMA controllers, in the VME interface 160 and possibly in one or more other interfaces as well.
This function will be described in greater detail below, where those interfaces are discussed.
Miscellaneous logic
Mode register
The mode registers 303 hold the value of little used control signals which can not justify dedicated microcode bits. The mode bits are:
Flow through or register control of the read holding registers.
Flow through or register control of the write holding registers.
External interrupt acknowledge signal that drives the interrupt acknowledge signal in the microcode expansion interface.
GIP interrupt request.
Loopback modE for the holding registers.
Two LED control signals.
TD bus decode
This logic (which is one of the most important functions of the decoder 360) -decodes the microcode TD 'source field, and accordingly controls the output enables of devices that can drive the TD bus 122. It also decodes the TD destination field (as qualified by a write gate signal from the clock generator 250) to generate strobe and write enable signals. Most of the ports on the TD bus 122 can be read and written, so mimic registers on the IPU are not required.
Possible TD bus sources and destinations include:
IPU 340
VME Interface Memory
Command memory
Data cache memory holding registers 560B
Mode register (8 bits)
Sequencer data port $*
Constant / next address field (source only) **
VME data FIFO
Data pipe 1
Data pipe 2 GIT FRO **
Interrupt vector register (8 bits)
DMA control register
DMA controller - address counter *
- - word counter *
* These sources are decoded by the DMA controller
instruction and not as part of the normal TD bus control
field.
** These sources only drive the lower 16 bits. When
one of them is selected, the sign/zero extend PAL 216 is also
activated, so that the data is either sign or zero extended up
to the bus width of 32 bits.
Note that only one source and one destination can be
selected, and they must be different. The transfer of data
into the IPU 340 is under control of the IPU 340's instruc
tion field so it can take data from the TD bus 122 at the same time it is being loaded into another destination.
Clock generator
As noted above, the clock generator 250 produces the
basic clock signals used throughout the data transfer proces
sor module 120.
Debug hardware
Most of the debug hardware included in the data transfer processor module 120 has already been mentioned in various places in the preceding description. These are summarized here for convenience:
Host control of microaddress bus 311 - both read and write.
Host loading and readback of the WCS.
VME generated interrupt to get the DTP's attention.
Hardware breakpoint support with no restriction on the number of breakpoints that are set at any one time.
Claw logic, which permits the user task to be single stepped without single stepping the monitor task.
All registers are read/write.
Hardware control of clocks for single stepping microcode.
All inter,-upts can be selectively enabled or disabled.
Access to the internal state of the critical logic groups to allow the complete state save and restore of the
DTP module's hardware states.
Microcode word format
The microcode -word format is generally shown in Figure 3C, and is defined below. Items marked with a * come directly from the WCS, and are pipelined internally in the devices they are- controlling.
The total number of microcode bits available are 96.
Most of the bits are used, but there are a few' spares that have not been included in the following fields.
IPU opcode (324 * This 'field controls the data
routing and arithmetic or logical operation of the IPU 340
integer processor. The allocation of bits within the field is
encoded and details will be found in the Weitek data sheets.
All instructions are encoded in the bottom 24 bits and the
top 8 bits are only used during the transfer of data into the
IPU 340's register file.
Sequencer opcode (7) * This field controls the
generation of the next address by the ADSP 1401. See data
sheet for the instruction set.
Constant / next address field (16) * This field is
mainly used for providing address information to the se quencer but can also be used to place a 16 bit constant value onto the data bus. This can then be loaded into any of the registers on this bus.
Multiwav branch select (2) * This field selects which set of FIFO status signals are to be used during a multiway branch operation. The choices are:
VME input FIFO
GIP input FIFO
Data Pipe 1 input FIFO Data Pipe 2 input FIFO
Multiwav shift control (2) This selects that the multiway# branch status information is inserted from bit po
sition 0, bit position 1, bit position 2 or not at all. The vari
ous shift factors allow for each- entry point within a multi- way branch to be 1, 2 or 4 instructions long respectively.
Multiwav branch transfer enable (1) This bit en ables or disables the data cache memory access granted sig
nal from being combined with the FIFO status. When it is not used the multiway branch is 4-way and when it is used it is 8-way.
Cvcle length (2) This field selects the cycle length appropriate to the instruction and data routing selected.
Data cache access (1) * This bit is active when
ever an access to the data cache memory is required by the
data transfer processor module 120.
Data cache write enable (1) This bit generates a
write cycle in the data cache memory if access to the data
cache memory has been granted.
Data cache write all (1) This bit overrides the normal write enable gating that allows selective updating of
words in the data cache memory and forces them all to be written. This only results in a data cache memory write cy
cle when access has been granted. This is useful when set
ting blocks of memory to a constant value.
Condition code select (5) This field selects one of the following condition codes to be tested by the sequencer during a conditional instruction:
IPU 340 condition code output microcode loop write flags (2 entries)
Data pipe input FIFO#1 half full and empty
Data pipe input FIFO#2 half full and empty
Data pipe output FIFO#1 full
Data pipe output FIFO#2 full
VME data input FIFO half full and empty
VME data output FIFO half full and empty
GIP interface (input) ' - half full and empty
GIP interface (output) full, half full, empty
Data cache memory cycle acknowledge
Microcode expansion interface condition code signal
DMA bus error
Hold status
Hold Status (1) This bit prevents the updating of the mimic status register that normally follows the state of the FLAG register inside the sequencer 210.Normally this
mimic bit follows the internal register's state, but during an interrupt service the mimic bit is prevented from being up
dated. This permits the FLAG register to be correctly re
stored when the interrupt routine is exited.
TD bus source (4) This field selects one of the
following registers, buffers or devices to drive the TD bus:
IPU 340
Command memory
VME interface memory
Data cache memory holding register
Mode register
Sequencer data port
Constant / next address field
Sequencer data port
Constant / next address field
VME data FIFO
Data pipe 1
Data pipe 2
GIP FIFO
Interrupt vector register (8 bits)
DMA control register
DMA controller - address counter
- word counter
TD bus destination (4) This field selects one of the following registers, buffers or devices as the destination of the data on the TD bus::
Command memory
VME interface memory
Data cache memory holding register
Mode register
Sequencer data port
Constant / next address field
Sequencer data port
VME data FIFO
Data pipe 1
Data pipe 2
GIP FIFO
Interrupt vector register (8 bits)
DMA control register
DMA controller - address counter
- word counter
The IPU 340 is not included in this list, because it can "grab" the data on the TD bus at any time. This function is controlled by the IPU instruction field.
Address register control (2) One of these control bits enables the loading of the address register and the other bit enables readback of the register for use by the diagnostics and debug monitor.
Breakpoint (1S(** Debug use only ** ) Set by the debug monitor to place a breakpoint on an instruction. This causes an interrupt to occur during the instruction so that control is passed to the debug monitor microcode after this instruction has finished.
Claw (1) (** Debug use only **) Set to prime the claw logic when single stepping a user task. This causes an interrupt to occur during the next instruction so that control is passed back to the debug monitor microcode after one user task instruction has been executed. This allows a user task to be single stepped without physically switching the clocks on and- off.
Interrupt CP (2) This generates an interrupt in the control processor module 110 at one of three levels. The levels- are allocated as follows:
New command from host received
Data transfer finished
Relinquish access to data cache memory
Zero or Sign extend (1) This bit only has any effect when a 16 bit wide register or device is read. In this case it selects whether the data is to be zero extended (bits 16-31 set to zero) or sign extended (bits 16- 31 set to the same as bit 15).
DMA controller instruction (3) This field controls the instructions to the DMA controller. The instructions available are concerned with reading and writing the internal registers, re-initializing the registers, and also the normal DMA operation of incrementing (or decrementing) the address and decrementing the word counter.
Microcode expansion bus
The microexpansion bus extends the basic microcode services off-board. This can be used to control some interface logic on the expansion peripheral board, or to control an entire peripheral board. Typical uses of this might be to interface to a bulk memory card or network interface card.
The expansion bus interface is electrically and mechanically identical to the expansion interface on the GIP so they can share any common expansion cards.
The expansion connector is a 96 way DIN connector, and the signals on it are:
Three-bit slice clocks. [Note 1]
Pipeline register clock. [ 1 ]
Microaddress bus 311B (15 bits) [ 2 ]
TD bus 122 (32 bits) [ 3 ]
Reset
WCS output enable
Pipeline register output enable
WCS write enable 324
Pipeline register mode control
Serial clock )
Serial data in ) for microcode loading
Serial data out )
External interrupt [4]
Interrupt acknowledge
Condition code [4]
Notes:
All signals are TTL levels unless specified differently.
[ 1 ] These signals are differential ECL levels.
[2] These signals are single ended ECL levels.
[ 3 ] This bus is 32 bits wide but can be considered for some purposes as two 16 bit buses - called the primary data bus and the secondary data bus.
[4] These signals are driven by open collector buffers.
The use of some ECL signals in this interface is useful in minimizing the effects of clock skew between boards.
Numeric Processor Module 130
The presently preferred embodiment of the numeric
processor module 130 is a floating-point processor. There
fore, the module 130 will sometimes be referred to as a
floating-point processor module (or "FP module"). However,
this module could optionally be configured for other data
types, e.g. as a complex arithmetic module or as a module for
wide-integer arithmetic. Therefore, this module will also
sometimes be referred to more generically, as a numeric
processor module 130.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the floating
point processor module 130 is very closely coupled to the
control/interface logic which governs data transfers between
the floating point processor and the cache memory. This control/interface logic is clocked by the microcode clock of
the control processor, and is preferably controlled by an ex
tension of the control processor microinstructions. In the
presently preferred embodiment, the Floating-point Proces
sor Module 130 and the control/interface logic (CP Extension
logic) are located together on a separate subboard, which
plugs into the main base board (where the cache memory
140 and the main part of the control processor module 110
are located). If additional modules 130 are used, each of
them would contain a portion of the control/interface logic.
In the present application, this controlA'nterface logic
is regarded as an extension of the control processor module 110. However, whether or not this control/interface logic is
regarded as part of module 110, the present application
contains some significant teachings regarding the timing and
control characteristics of this logic.
The presently preferred embodiment uses a 32 bit
data structure. Each floating-point number is represented by
32 bits, and therefore 32-bit units are referred to as float
ing-point words (or "F~words"). In the presently preferred
embodiment, the number format is 24 bits mantissa and 8 bits exponent. This can be, selectably, either IEEE format or
DEC format.
The internal operation of the floating point processor module 130 will first be discussed. The features of the interface to the control processor module 110 and to the cache memory 140 will then be discussed in greater detail.
Figures 4A through 4D show key portions of the numeric processing module 130, in the presently preferred embod#iment. Figure 4A schematically shows the interface logic 410 which is used to interface to the control processor module 110. Figure 4B shows some key portions of the data path in the module 130. Figure 4C shows the logic used in the presently preferred embodiment, for microcode access and decoding. Figure 4D shows the microinstruction format used in the floating-point module 130 in the presently preferred embodiment.
The floating-point arithmetic unit, where the actual numeric calculations are performed at high speed, will be described first. The double-buffering operations, by which data is transferred across the clock boundary between the
FP module 130 and the slower modules, will then be de
scribed. Next, the further stages of data transfer (largely
controlled by extensions of the CP module 110) will be de
scribed. Finally, the program control which governs the
arithmetic unit will be described.
Floating-Point Arithmetic Unit (FPU)
The floating-point arithmetic path of the presently
preferred embodiment is quite simple, and runs at high
speed. This path includes a floating point multiplier, a float
ing point ALU (arithmetic and logic unit), and fast multiport
register files, all controlled by a very fast, but simple, se
quencer. In addition, a scratchpad memory is closely coupled
to the inner data paths, to hold lookup tables and provide
histogram storage or data stack operations.
contains a multiplexer, so 64 bit wide numbers can be transferred in or out.
The result ports of the two calculation units are connected in parallel (to results bus 433, and thereby to write port 430D of the register file). This permits the calculation units to swap data without using external multiplexers or routing data through the register file. This is useful, for example, when sum of products calculations are done. This capability is also useful in permitting rapid data transfer to and from the" & ratc'hpad" memory 1610. However, a restriction of this configuration is that both the FMPY 440 and
FALU 450 can not be active at the same time (except for a sum of products operation), because the output ports are tied together. Even if the ports were separate, then the problem could exist on the input side, since both devices share the same data path from the register files 430.
The actual arithmetic devices used offer a degree of flexibility in configuring the input and output ports to be registered or transparent. However, in the presently preferred embodiment this capability is not used, and all the ports are registered. The internal data -paths and the function unit of both calculation units are all 64 bits wide, and can perform both single precision (SP) and double precision
(DP) calculations.
The function unit in the FMPY 440 supports 4 arith
metic instructions. The minimum cycle times (in nanosec
onds) for both precisions are:
Single Double
Multiply 40 59 Divide 200 300
Square root 300 600
Pass 40 50
Integer multiply 45 The function unit in the FALU 450 supports a very
wide range of floating point instructions, integer instructions and conversion instructions. For further details, the manufacturer's data sheet can be consulted. All floating point instructions (single and double precision) execute in a minimum cycle time of 25 ns; the integer operations all take 12 ns and all the conversions take 25 ns.
The more common instructions iriclude: Floating point: add and subtract (signed or absolute), absolute, negate, scale, merge, normalize, and compare.
Conversions:
SP - > 32 bit integer, signed or unsigned
SP - > 64 bit integer, signed or unsigned SP- < - 32 bit integer, signed or unsigned
SP < - 64 bit integer, signed or unsigned
DP - > 32 bit integer, signed or unsigned
DP - > 64 bit integer, signed or unsigned
DP < - 32 bit integer, signed or unsigned
DP < - 64 bit integer, signed or unsigned
SP - > DP
DP - > SP
- Integer: add (with O, 1, carry) subtract (with 0, -1, -carry) max (signed or unsigned) min (signed or unsigned) logical shift (logical or arithmetic) rotates bit reverse.
Scratchpad Memorv 1610
As seen in Figure 16, the scratchpad memory 1610, with its address counter 1611, hangs on the results bus 433.
Since the calculation units 440 and 450 have bidirectional ports onto this bus, data can be read directly from this memory by multiplier 440, ALU 450, or Register file 430.
The address counter 1611 permits several modes of access to this memory. Depending on two mode bits, the address counter may (at each read or write access) increment the address, decrement the address, hold the address, or permit the address to be specified. (For example, combinations of address incrementing and decrementing can readily be used for operation as a stack.) The address generation capability of the counter 1611 permits the memory 1610 to function at one write per cycle, under some conditions.
The operation of this memory as a stack is particularly advantageous for scalar programming with compilers, as discussed above.
When running histogram algorithms, the previous subtotal (of the parameter being tracked) can be read out onto results bus 433. In one simple example of such an operation, the memory 1610 is designated as data source for results bus 433, and the ALU 450 is commanded to read an operand value from the results bus, while the multiplier 440 is working. When the multiplier 440 finishes, it drives its result onto, the results bus 433, and the ALU reads in that value as a second operand. The ALU then drives the sum
onto the results bus 433, while the memory 1610 is com
manded- to write that result. (Meanwhile, additional
operands can be loaded into multiplier 440.)
This table also provides a very convenient storage for
data-dependent parameters. This is particularly convenient
when calculating transcendental functions.
Fast Register Files 430
The register files 430 form the main interface with the
data cache memory 140. One bank of the register files runs
in partial synchrony with the CP module 110, and interfaces
with the FP holding registers 420 through local transfer bus 422 (connected to bidirectional port 430A (Fig. 16)). The other bank runs synchronously with the FP module, and interfaces with operand busses 431, 432 (read ports 430B and 430C), results bus 433 (read port 430D), and loopback connection 434 (write port 430E).
Figure 4B shows some key portions of the data path in the module 130. The main cache bus 144 (which is 256 bits wide) is interfaced to a series of four FP holding registers 420. (These holding registers are actually paired, so that a read register is paralleled by a write register. Thus, there àre eight holding registers 420, each 64 bits wide, to provide a bidirectional 256-bit interface.) The eight holding registers 420 receive separate enable signals 421. Thus, this bank of registers permits the 256 bit wide cache bus 144 to be mul tippexed into the 64 bit wide fast register file 430.
This multiplexing is performed primarily for cost reasons. The fast register files 430 are very expensive chips.
Using four times as many of them would very significantly increase the cost of the system. Moreover, as may be seen from Figure 38B, the footprint of these devices is very significant (due to their very high pin count), so that using sixteen of these packages rather than four would add significant demands on board area.
There are actually four registers 430, and not merely two. Each of the physically separate chips is 18 bits wide, so four of them in parallel are used to provide a 64 bit interface to the local transfer bus 422. (Note that this interface is two F~words wide.)
In the presently preferred embodiment, the register files 430 are constructed from 5 port devices which are 18 bits wide by 64 locations deep. Thus, the 64-bit side interface to local transfer bus 422 requires four devices to be used in parallel. (For clarity, Figure 4B shows the register file as if it were two 32-bit wide files. This helps to show the word address odd/even status structure discussed below. for clarity, Figure 16 simply shows the register file 430 as a single file.) In the presently preferred best mode, these devices have been actually constructed using part number B2210 from BIT.
Ideally the register files would be 256 bits wide, to permit a more direct interface to the cache bus 144, but this would require significant added hardware expense. The alternative used in the presently preferred embodiment is to use FP holding registers 420 (with associated control logic), to multiplex the 256-bit interface to cache bus 144 down onto a 64 bit wide port 430A. The multiplexing and data routing is controlled by transfer logic, shown generally in
Figures 4A and 4B, which will be discussed in greater detail below.
The interconnections of these files are preferably as follows. (The ports are individually labelled in Figure 16.)
Each of the files 430 has a bidirectional interface 430A, which connects to the registers 420, through lines 422.
Each of the register files 430 has two transparent data outputs. These outputs can be separately enabled, so that they can repre#sent different words from within the register file 430. These outputs 430B and 430C drive local
operand buses 431 and 432.
Each of the register files 430 has an input port
430D which is connected to a third local data bus 433, which
will be referred to as the results bus. This results bus is con
nected to the outputs of the calculation units 440 and 450.
Each of the register files 430 has another input
port 430E, which is tied to read port 430B by loopback con
nection 434 to first operand bus 431. This write port takes
its address from the "results" write port 430D. This allows
data to be copied from one register file address to another
without having to go through the ALU 450 or multiplier 440,
thus saving two cycles of delay. This means that data can be
rapidly reordered and shuffled as desired, without using the
calculation units 440 and 450 and incurring the delays asso
ciated with these parts. This capability can be particularly
advantageous in handling subroutines.
Thus, the five-port register files 430 each have two
read ports D and E, two write ports B and C, and one bidirec
tional port A. The read ports feed operands to the FMPY 440
and FALU 450, and the results are written back using write
port 430D (or, if desired, write port 430E). The register files
can store 128 F~words.
The data, address and write enables for write ports
430D and 430E (and the write part of the bidirectional port
430A) are registered internally to the register file 430. An
internal write pulse is automatically generated.
The two read ports can have their data paths regis
tered or latched (both must be the same), and their ad
dresses registered or latched. The configuration used on the
floating-point processor module 130 is to register the ad
dresses as these are driven directly from the microcode and
to hold the data latches transparent. The data is registered
internally to the FMPY 440 and FALU 450.
The register files can operate in a "write through"
mode, when the read and write addresses are the same. In
this mode the written data appears on the read port in the same cycle, but about 10 ns later than a normal read opera
tion. This is useful for recursive or scalar calculations where
it is advantageous to reduce the number of pipeline stages.
Separate addresses for the read port 430B, read port 430C, and write port 430D, are supplied by fields of the FP microcode. This allows rl = r2 OP r3 type of calculations to be performed within the constraints of the pipelining.
Double Buffering
The highly multi-ported fast register file 430 is a key element in providing a clean interface between the control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130. The address space of this register file is partitioned, to act as a double buffer. At any given time, one bank of this register file runs quasi-synchronously to the control processor module 110, and the other bank runs synchronously to the floating point processor module 130. (The operations which are quasi-synchronous to the CP module are discussed in detail below. These quasi-synchronous operations may be regarded as providing a transitional clock domain, which helps in providing a high-bandwidth interface.)
The assignments of the two banks are interchanged, under the control of handshaking logic, at synchronization points.Thus, this clock boundary placement permits changes to be made on one side of the boundary without affecting the other side.
This clean interface provides a migration path to faster, or more, integrated floating point chip sets, and hence provides floating point device independence. (The function and use of the handshaking logic will be described in greater detail below, with reference to Figure 22, where the interaction between the CP module and the FP module is described.)
Thus, the register file 430 is double buffered for the normal exchange of data and results. However, unlike prior systems such as that of Figure 18 and 19, this double buffering is not inflexible. Thus, both the control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130 can access any of the addresses in either bank of the register files 430. The fact that the accesses are not locked out of the opposite bank is used to great advantage, as will be seen below.
Since hardware access is not cut off, each access to the register files must (at some level) specify the full 7 bits of address (A0:A6). Where the double buffering operation is being used, only six bits of address are actually needed (to address a location within the currently available bank). The double buffering operation is actually achieved by modifying the top address bit on the fly. A mode signal indicates how the top address bit is to be modified.
Thus, the register file addresses specified in the microcode are modified automatically by hardware. The double buffering is controlled by a "bank select" signal which determines which half of the register file the floating-point processor module 130 has access to, and which half the control processor module 110 has access to. This bank select signal is not controlled directly by the microcode fields, but is toggled (by separate logic) only when both the control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130 have requested a swap.
The double buffering uses partitioning on the top address bit (A6). (By contrast, Figure 4B shows two files side by side, to indicate double-word structure of the file. This corresponds to partitioning on the bottom address bit (AO).)
Each register file address (7 bits) is accompanied by a two bit modifier, which selects one of the following address modes:
Physical address: This uses the address specified without any modification.
Logical address: This is selected when the automatic soft double buffering is used, and it causes the most significant bit of the address to be replaced by the bank se lect bit. The control processor module 110 register file address would use the inverse of this bit.
Preview: This allows the floating-point processor module 130 to preview the data on the other side of the bank, without having to swap the banks or use physical addressing. To keep the calculation pipeline full when crossing a synchronization point, access to the new data is needed (if it has been imported yet). However, there will normally be a delay due to pipelining: the banks can not be swapped over until all the results for the current bank have been written.
This access mode circumvents that delay, since a read access can be taken from the opposite bank of the register files 430, before the bank swap is actually performed. This is accomplished by replacing the most significant bit of the address with the inverse of the bank select bit.
Figure 20 shows generally the logic used to accomplish the address modification for double buffering. The right side of this Figure shows the interface of register files 430 to the
CP module 110, and the left side shows the interface to the remainder of FP. module. 130. Thus, the data connections on the right side would correspond to port' 430A (shown in Figure 16), and thence to FP holding registers 420 and cache bus 144. The data connections on the left side would correspond to ports 430B, C, D, and E (as shown in Figure 16), and thence to multiplier 440, FALU 450, etc. The address inputs on the right side would correspond to data fields extracted from the microinstructions called up from WCS extension 490 by the CP microaddress bus 211A.The address fields on the left would correspond to data fields extracted from the microinstructions called up from FP WCS 470 by the FP microaddress bus 473. (The register file 430 has internal pipeline registers for the address inputs, and therefore receives the microinstruction bits unregistered.)
Two address modification logic units 2010 are shown.
They essentially identical, except that their connections to
SEL and SEL-bar are reversed. Thus, if both the CP and FP attempt to access the same address in logical mode, the address modification operations of their respective logic units 2010 would result in opposite A6 bit output addresses, which neatly implements the double-buffer function. The address logic unit also receives the top bit (A6) of a sevenbit address taken from one of the CP or FP microcode fields.
It also receives a 2-bit mode signal.
In the actual implementation of the presently preferred embodiment, three address modification logic units 2010 are used on the FP side (one each for ports 430B, 430C, and 430D).
The complementary bank select signals SEL and SELbar are provided from port select logic 2020. These two signals are reversed whenever both the FP module and CP module have requested a bank swap. (The logic which accomplishes this is described in much greater detail below.)
Reduced setup time for unregistered bits
In implementing the address modification logic 2010, some additional logic, as shown in Figure 17, has been added. This additional logic solves a general problem, and may usefully be adapted for use in many contexts.
Many manufactures of "bit slice" components are including pipeline registers in their ICs. However, any processing which is done on the microcode bits before they reach the chip must be added to the chip's setup time. This is the situation which occurred in implementing the soft double-buffering system just described. -The problem is that the address modification logic 2010, in processing the most significant bit of the register file address (the "A6" bit) to implement the logical, physicàl and preview modes of ad dressing, adds- an extra 10 ns onto the cycle time. When (as in the presently preferred embodiment) the cycle time can be less than 30 ns, this is a very significant overhead.
Therefore, some additional logic, as shown in Figure 17, was introduced to remove the extra 10 ns from the cycle time (on many cycles). The potential for doing this occurs when the addressing mode remains the same from one cycle to the next. In this situation, the setup time has already been paid for in the earlier cycle. However, as the microcode address changes and new data is accessed in the writable control store (WCS), the unregistered microcode bits will not be stable. Therefore, the setup time would have to be in- curred again, unnecessarily.
The logic shown in Figure 17 holds ti modified ad- dress bits constant in a separate register 1740 A special mi- crocode bit (called "useold~A6") is used to se#t (using flip flop 1720 to control multiplexer 1730) that thc old A6 valuer (fed back from register 1740) be used, rather than the mi- crocode derived one. (When using a microcode assembler, the-"useold~A6" microcode bit can be automatically set by the microcode assembler, so the programmer doesn't need t.
worry about this opDmization.) The multiplexer 1730 is contained in the same PAL as the address modificalierl logic, so this multiplexer does not introduce any additmal delay.
Cache bus interface and control
As discussed above, many aspects of the operation of the numeric processor module are controlled by an extension of the control processor module 110. Most of this logic is physically on the FP module, but is controlled by the microcode of the control processor module 110, and interfaces to the CD bus.
There sre several distinguishable parts of the cache bus interface, to manage the transfers of data among the data cache memory 140, the FP holding registers 420, and the register files 430. The principal parts of this interface are: holding registers 420; dåta cache transfer logic; and local transfer bus logic 2110.
Holding Registers 420
The holding registers 420 include eight 32-bit registers. (These registers are bidirectional; each contains a read side and a write side which, internally, are parallel.) These
registers are arranged with 256 bits on the data cache mem
ory side, but only 64 on the register file side. The output en
ables on the register file side select one of the four groups of
registers to drive the 64 bit local transfer bus 422 to - the
register files 430. (The operation of this interface will be
discussed in greater detail below.)
Data Cache Transfer Logic
The data cache transfer logic is located on the main
board, and is part of the CP transfer logic 550. It provides a
module select address (3 bits), an output enable, and a clock.
This logic controls transfers between the cache memory 140
and the holding registers 420. If this module is selected,
then the output enable signal, when active, enables the
holding registers 420 to transfer data onto the cache bus
144.
Local Transfer Bus Control Logic
The local transfer bus control logic 2110 is shown in
Figure 21. This logic is responsible for the data transfers
between the holding registers 420 and the register files 430.
Within a single transfer cycle there are 4 minor cycles, corresponding to the 4 pairs of words that can be trans
ferred to or from the register file. These . minor cycles are gener-ate#d .-by a dedicated clock, which runs at very high
speed. ' Transfer Clock Generator 412
The transfer clock generator 412 provides the transfer
clock outputs only during a major transfer cycle. It is trig
gered to run when both the CP clock and a transfer enable
bit indicate a "go" condition.
The transfer clock generator is partly, but not entirely,
asynchronous to the CP - clock generator 250. A high-fre
quency ECL circuit is connected to a 70 MHz oscillator, and,
until the CP clock generator indicates a "go" condition, the high-frequency circuit simply keeps looping. Thus, on every edge of the high-frequency clock, the "go" status will be checked. This means that a "go" status will be detected within at most one period of the high-frequency clock.
When the go condition is detected, the transfer clock generator begins dividing down the high-frequency oscillator input, to produce the transfer clock outputs for a major transfer cycle. Depending on the particular major transfer cycle -being performed, between two and five clock beats will be produced during a major transfer cycle. The clock beats are connected to all eight holding registers 420.# The sequential access to these registers is "phased" by an overlaid walking zero pattern, as described below.
Figure 47 schematically shows the timing relations here.
The high-speed variable-length clock 480, which clocks the operation of the calculation units 440 and 450 (as well as data ports 430A, 430B, 430C, 430D, and 430E of the register file 430) is shown at the bottom, for reference.
Above that is shown the high-speed ECL loop of the transfer clock 412 Above that is -shown the enable signal which (with the CP microcode' ,clock) starts the transfer clock generator 412 on a major transfer cycle.
Above that is shown the transfer clock.
Above that is shown the CP microcode clock, generated by CP clock generator 250.
Thus, the transfer clock generator in effect provides an intermediate clock zone, which expedites the transfer between the data cache memory 140 (which is controlled by the CP clock generator 250) and the inner bank of the Register File 430 (which is controlled by the FP clock generator 480).
The clock boundary between the FPU and the data cache memory is a very important boundary. This boundary
crosses not merely a clock phase boundary, but also a po
tentially dra#stic difference in clock frequency. Moreover, as
noted above, net transfer bandwidth across this boundary is
critical.
The presently preferred embodiment bridges this
boundary in two steps.
The double buffering of Register File interface
provides a transfer from the FP clock domain to the transi
tional clock domain.
High-speed multiplexed transfer (from the outer
bank of Register File 430 into the FP interface of the FP
Holding Registers 420) occurs within the transitional clock domain Transfers from Holding Registers 420 into Data
Cache Memory 140 occur wholly within the CP clock domain.
Some general points regarding this clock frequency
difference should be noted:
The relation between the minor transfer cycle
duration and the minimum FP cycle time is not accidental.
As noted above, the worst burden on cache bandwidth
comes from diadactic operatio#ns. For example, in a vector
add, two operands and one result must be transferred be
tween the register file and the cache. On the FPU side of the
register file, the two operands wih be read out in parallel,
and (pipelined with- this) the result will simultaneously be
written back.# int6 the register file. Thus, in the worst case,
two words must be written into Register file 430 and one
word must be read out, for every calculation cycle of the cal
culation units. Not all operations will be diadactic, but, in many applications, the the average may not be much more
favorable.
In embodiments using a transitional clock domain, as discussed above, it is most preferable that: the minor cycle duration, divided by the number of words transferred per minor cycle, should preferably be in the range of one-half to one-third times the minimum duration of a calculation cycle in the FPU. However, the advantages of the two-stage interface, using a transitional clock domain, can be largely obtained even if this numeric relation is not met.
Note that the advantages of the transitional clock domain are generally applicable to systems where a highspeed numeric calculation units are used. The clock interface architecture described permits such units to be isolated in their own clock domain, so that their clock can be run at the maximum possible. This teaching is independent of the particular timings, and is independent of the device technologies used. For example, this interface architecture could be used in the future to integrate a limited number of calculation units in expensive high-speed technologies (such as
Josephson junction or III-V device technologies) into a large computer system.
Control Signals
To keep the number of control signals down (both on the input and output sides) there are some restrictions on how the 8 F~words are transferred from the holding registers 420 into the register files 430. The need for this is clearly demonstrated by considering the addresses. Eight F~words would require 8 separate addresses, if total flexi bility - was necessary; and, with each address requiring 9 bits to specify it, there would be 72 bits of address information in total.
The input control signals are:
Direction. Specifies whether data is transferred from the register files to the holding registers or vice versa.
Register Address (6 bits). This specifies the start address where data is transferred to or from in the register file. This address is incremented after every minor transfer cycle and will wrap around when it gets to 64. Note that
from the FPU side the register file addresses are 7 bits be
cause they reference 32 bit words rather than 64 bit ones.
Logicallphysical address modifier. This selects
whether the address is modified to implement soft double buffering.
Transfer length (3 bits). This determines the number of F~words transferred (1...8).
Transfer start (3 bits). This specifies the first F,word to transfer out of the eight. These bits can be defined by a microcode field, or a register field, or they can be the least significant 3 bits of the CA bus 111. If the transfer start + transfer length > 8 then the F~word selection wraps around.
Transfer enable. Enables a transfer cycle to occur in the current control processor module 110 cycle.
Module select. Selects one of the four floatingpoint processor modules to take part in the transfer.
The control signals to the register files and the holding registers are:
Holding register group output enables (4). Selects the register group to drive the 64 bit data bus. If the transfer direction is from the register file 430 to the holding registers 420, then none of these enables will be active.
Holding register group clocks (8). There are four clock enables, which sequence through the patterns 1110, 1101, 1011, 0111 (a "walking low" pattern). These four clock enables select the 64 bit group register. A static 8 bit clock mask selects which two of the 32 bit registers will actually be enabled to access the local transfer bus 422. (Note that the start position within the pattern depends on the transfer start, and the number of patterns depends on the transfer start and transfer length parameters.)
Register file address (7). Increments on every minor cycle and is modified depending on the state of the logical/physical address modifier.
Register file read/write control (2). There is a separate control for each pair of register files so an odd number of writes can be done. These are decoded from the transfer length and address.
Register file output enable. Derived from the transfer direction control signals.
Constraints on Transfers
The interface just described results in some constraints on transfers. These restrictions are best explained by showing how data maps between the data cache memory 140, holding registers 420, local transfer bus 422, and register files 430.
The register file 430 has some double-word structuring. That is, it appears to the FPU to be 32 bits wide, but to the local transfer bus 422 the register file 430 appears to be 64 bits wide.
The use of a two-words-wide interface from register file 430 to local transfer bus 422, with a transfer clock of (effectively) no more than four minor-cycle phases being applied to the eight registers 420, is very advantageous in maximizing transfer speed (and in permitting the use of a static clock mask). However, a side effect is that some odd/even structure gets built into the file address structure.
This is shown schematically in Figure 46. The eight F~words in the width of the FP holding registers are hatched in opposite directions, to indicate which is even and which is odd. The result of the double-word transfer is that any even
F~words which are transferred (WO, W2, W4 and W6) will map to the left side of the register file 430. These will therefore map to even register file addresses as seen by the
FPU. Correspondingly, any odd F~words which are transferred will map to the right side of the register file 430, and will therefore map to even register file addresses as seen by the FPU.
The less serious implication of this is that if (in a series
of scattered read accesses from cache memory 140) all
transfers are from even data cache addresses, then only half
of the addresses in the register file 430 can be used.
The more important consideration is that if a single F word (for example) is being transferred from a calculated
address, then the data could end up at either the even or
odd address in the register file, and program steps would
need to be used to ensure that this data was accessed (by
the FPU) from the correct side.
The presently preferred embodiment provides the
user with five options which can be used to avoid such
problems:
1. The CP module 110 can shuffle data in the
DCM, so that any data being transferred starts on an even
address in DCM
2. Transfer logic carries a status bit, showing
whether the last transfer was to an even or odd address. The
FP logic can test this status bit. However, note that this only
supplies information for# the very last transfer.
3. Double write cycles could be used, with data
valid flags, to permit the odd/even characteristic of the word address to be ignored at some points. That is, the
memory actually used in Register Files430, in the presently
preferred einbodiment, includes two parity bit locations for
every sixteen bits of data. Since the presently preferred em
bodiment does not use parity checking, these extra bits are
available for other uses. In particular, they can be used to
carry "data valid" flags along with the data.
Thus, all writes from the holding registers 420 would
write a pair of F words, from a pair of the holding registers,
into the two words on both sides of the register file 430.
4. A register bit, written by the CP module 110,
can be used to indicate the current word location odd/even
status. The FP module can then test this register bit to do
conditional branches.
5. The CP module 110 can change the FP pro
gramming, as a way to inform the FP of correct word
odd/even status, by changing the start address in register
478.
A further alternative is that dedicated hardware could
be added, to perform word swapping on the fly. This alter
native is not preferred, since such dedicated hardware
would add delay to every transfer (whether swapped or
not).
The control of the transfer doesn't allow non-contigu
ous addresses to be transferred within one major transfer
cycle. For example, it would take 2 major transfer cycles to
transfer WO and W2 from the holding registers into the reg
ister file. However, if W1 could be transferred as well (even
if it is never used) then only one major transfer cycle is nec essary.
When transferring -data from the Register File 430 to
the cache memory 140, similar considerations arise when
scattered writes are being performed. The preferred ap
proach in this case is to perform writes to both sides of the
Register File simultaneously. That is, as shown in Figure 4B,
the two (physically separate) Register File portions 430 and
430' can both be enabled, so that data written in from re
sults bus 433 is written into both the even and odd words.
When this duplicated data is written out to Holding Registers
420, it can be written into all eight of them simultaneously.
(This function is activated by the HR~Clock~All bit in mi
crocode.)
Holding Register/Transfer Clock Operation
As noted, a clock having at most four beats for transfer
enable is used for the transfers between holding registers
420 and register files 430. (In the presently preferred em bodiment, this clock can actually have as many as five beats per major transfer cycle. Four of the these beats activate respective pairs of the holding register banks, and the fifth phase provides some margin for pipeline overheads. As presently operated, the phases of this clock are about 30 ns.
Therefore, a major cycle is about 150 ns. (Of course, these times could be changed.)
This clock structure shows a significant advantage of the double-word transfer architecture used at the interface from the cache bus 144 to the holding registers 430. Since the transfer logic sees the holding register 430 as being two words wide, the transfer operation can be treated as if it were only a 4:1 multiplexing, rather than 8:1 multiplexing.
FP Program Control
Figure 4C shows the logic used, in the presently preferred embodiment, for FP microcode access and decoding.
Microinstruction Sequencing
In the presently preferred embodiment, the nùmeric processing module 130 does not use a highly integrated "sequencer". Instead, the functions of defining the address for- microinstructions to be executed, and of decoding the microinstructions, are implemented using a lower level of integration, to maximize speed. A writable control store 470 contains microinstructions which are accessed by a microin
struction address input 473. The microinstruction address source is selected by the next-address logic 472, which receives condition code inputs, as well as outputs from the decoding of the microcode word.
The microaddress can come from one of four sources during normal operation (i.e. apart from intervention by the control processor module or by the host). These sources are: "True" Address Register 474;
"False" Address Register 475;
Stack Register 478; and
Start Address Register 479.
Every instruction contains a "true" address field and a "false" address field. The combination of the two addresses permits conditional jumps. The true address alone permits unconditional jumps and "continue" instructions.
To accomplish this, certain fields of the microinstructions 471 are fed into two registers 474 and 475. These registers permits the "true" and "false" addresses to be buffered, so that, depending upon the outcome of a logical test, one or the other can be loaded back in as the next microinstruction address 473. That is, these registers provide rapid conditional branch capability.
Note that an additional register 476 is provided, for the microcode bits that do not use on-chip pipeline registers.
Stack Register 478
Stack register 478 provides some significant additional capability for FP program control. This can provide outputs
on the microaddress bus 473, and can receive inputs from
certain bits of the microinstruction bus 471, as will be dis
cussed below.
However, the requirements of a stack' to use with the
high-speed microcoded architecture of the FP module are
somewhat unusual. The presently preferred embodiment provides a stack which not only provides the necessary last
in-first-out (LIFO) operation at high speed, but also provides
additional flexibility which is very useful for debugging.
Achieving this functionality required some new structure, as
shown in Figure 39.
The conventional way to implement a stack function
has been with a register file whose output enable and write
enable signals were tied to an address counter, so that every
"pop" (read) operation decremented the counter and every
"push" (write) operation incremented it.
The central portion 3920 is a multilevel pipeline register, which is a commercially available part from AMD (AMD 29520). This part contains four pipelined registers 3921, and an output multiplexer 3922 which can be used to select one of the registers 3921 for output. (The normal mode of operation of a device of this type would be either as a FIFO, or to provide a fixed delay.)
In the embodiment shown, the control capabilities of this register are used, under control of a PAL 3910, to implement the LIFO operation. The PAL receives command signals to pop or push the stack. A read~stack input is also provided, so that (primarily - for diagnostics) the state of the stack can be read without changing it. For use in this mode, an offset input is provided, which can be used to read out a stack level which is relative to the top level.
The output of the stack register is connected to the microaddress bus 473. The input to the stack register is provided by the false address, for reasons which will now be discussed.
Subroutine Operation
Stack register 478 provides a powerful capability for subroutine operation. The microcode instruc#tion which calls a subroutine will state the subroutine address in the true field, and the :return address in the false field. A short field of this instruction will also contain a push command, so that the stack register saves the "false" address output. At the end of the subroutine a pop command will enable the stack register to output the return address onto the microinstruction bus 473.
Thus, the four levels of the stack register 478 permit up to four levels of subroutines to be nested.
Clock generator 480
The cycle times for different instructions in the FMPY
and FALU are different. It would be useful to tailor the cycle
time accordingly, to optimize the calculation rate. The most
important difference (15 ns) is between the FALU operations
and the single precision multiply.
The FMPY has some very long instruction, such as di
vide and square root, where their execution times are 200
ns and 300 ns respectively. Two options are provided for
these slower instructions:
Extend the cycle length by the appropriate
amount.
Disable the clock enables to the FMPY while the long instructions are in progress, but keep the instruction and data streams going to the FALU at the normal data rate.
This will allow several FALU operations to be hidden under a divide operation, which might benefit some algorithms.
The clock generator produces two waveforms - the microcode clock and a write gate for the scratchpad memory.
The minimum cycle length the clock generator produces is 21 ns, and this can be varied in 7- ns steps, up to a maximum cycle length of 98 ns. In the presently preferred embodiment, the minimum practical cycle length is 28 ns (since the
WCS memory access time is the limiting factor). The cycle time for FALU operations is 28 ns, and 41 ns for single precision multiply operations.
The clock generator is implemented as an ECL state machine running with an input frequency of 140 MHz to give the timing resolution. The use of this ECL state machine in combination with TTL sequencing logic and high-speed calculation units, turns out to be quite advantageous. (As noted above, the register files 430 and the calculation units 440 and 450 have ECL internals with TTL peripherals.)
The clock generator can receive the following control inputs:
a stop or start command may be received from
the VME interface (i.e. from the host), or from the CP module
110;
a length input field from the microinstruction
bus 471;
a stretch input will command a "wait state" (or
longer cycle length when the CP forces the start address
register to be the microaddress source for the next FP micro
cycle; and the breakpoint bit is also connected to the clock
generator, and commands it to stop instantly.
As noted above, there# is also a transfer clock generator
412 in the CP Extension Logic. This clock is not related to the
clock g#enerator 280. (However, note that both of these clock
generators exploit the advantages of using ECL logic in a
clock generator which is driving TTL logic parts.)
Microcode Compaction
One of the notable features of operation of the FP
module 130 is the use of compacted microcode. That is, some
logic is provided at the interface to WCS 470, which permits
a field of the microinstruction to be replaced on the fly by a
previously registered value.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the field
which can be replaced in this fashion is the operate specifier.
However, in other systems, it would be quite possible to re
place other microinstruction fields in this fashion.
Thus, for example, for operations which mapped two
arrays onto a third array (e.g. Ci = Ai + Bi), the instruction
register could be loaded with an operation specifier (e.g.
"ADD") before a sequence of such operations was begun. The
sequence of operations would then be stated in code which
did not specify the operation directly.
This logic is shown in Figure 45. An instruction register
4510 is loaded with an operate specifier (8 bits). This oper ate specifier corresponds to one of the fields of the microinstructions stored in WCS 470.
In response to the "Use~IR" bit (which is written into a register by the CP module 110, and therefore changes relatively infrequently), PAL 4520 selects whether to enable the output memories 470B or Instruction Register 4510.
If the "Use~IR" bit were assigned to a field in the microinstruction, it could change at every cycle. However, in this case the extra delay in decoding which specifier to use (and then enabling it) would increase the cycle length on every cycle where a change was made.
WCS 470 is actually physically configured, in the presently preferred embodiment, as 26 integrated circuit memories, each 4 bits wide. Thus, two of these physical memories store the 8 bits of the operate specifier field.
These two memories are shown as portion 470B, and the memories which store the other fields of the WCS 470 are shown as 470A.
The instruction register 4510 can be read or written from the CD bus 122, by specifying it (in CP microcode) as the CD bus source or destination.
Note also that the PAL 4520 also receives another bit of input, so that its bypass operation can be disabled during microcode load operations.
Parallel loading of microcode
Figure 29 schematically shows how the WCS 470 interfaces to the wide cache bus 144. The 64-bit local bus 422, which connects the FP holding registers 420 to port 430A of the register file 430, is also connected to the serial shadow registers 481 which hang on the microinstruction data line 471. (As extensively discussed elsewhere, these serial registers interface the control store 470 to the serial loop used to transmit microinstructions from the host.)
This additional connectionis particularly advantageous
in the numeric processor module 130, since it permits mi
crocode overlays to be changed very rapidly.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the serial
shadow register 481 is actually configured as two physically
separate registers 481A and 481B. These registers not only
provide a bidirectional interface to the data port of the con
trol store 470, but also can receive data from the local bus
422. As mentioned above, the microinstruction fields in the
CP Extension logic contain bits, indicating the data destina
tion of the local bus 422, which can command this read.
As noted above, each FP microinstruction is 104 bits
wide. However, to conform to the automatic shifting of data
around the serial interface loop, the shift register 481 has
been- made 112 bits in length. That is, the number of mi
croinstruction bits has been rounded up to the next even
multiple of 16, to define the length of the shift register at
the interface. In the presently preferred embodiment, reg
ister 481A is 64 bits wide, and register 481B is 48 bits wide.
After the registers 481 have been loaded with a mi
croinstruction (in two minor transfer cycles of. the local
transfer bus 422), they are driven to load the instruction
back into the WCS 470. This will require an address to be
placed on the FP microaddress bus 473, and will also require
a write enable signal to-be transmitted to the WCS 470.
In serial loading, the host uses the CP microad
dress reg#ister to hold the address of the FP WCS to load (or
read), and routes this address to the FP WCS. (Note that the
input from CP microaddress bus 211A is fed into FP mi
croaddress bus 473 by the buffer shown at the top of Figure 4C.)
In the parallel loading mode, the CP places the
target address in the start register 479.
Additional logic is also provided for interface to the
host. This logic permits microinstructions to be read from or
written to the control store 470. This function will be dis
cussed in greater detail below.
Starting an FP-microcode routine running
When the FP module starts up, it will normally go into
a wait state, because of the FPWAIT/CPWAIT handshaking
logic described below. To start a routine running in the FP
module, one bit of the CP microcode can force the microin
struction address held in start register 479 to be use#d as the next microaddress on the FP microinstruction address bus 473. This action is qualified by the module selection, as described below.
Selecting an FP module(s)
At the highest level, a floating-point processor module
130 must be selected before it can be controlled. In a singlemodule configuration, the FP module is selected all the time, and some of the following comments don't apply. However, in a multiple-module configuration, the desired FP module (or algorithm accelerator) must be selected before it can be controlled. 'Several FP modules can be selected at once, to allow data or control information# to be broadcast to a subset of the FP modules. The FP modules can be selected in one of three ways:
a 3-bit value previously stored in a control register can be used;
a microcode field can be used;
or, less preferably, the CP Extension Logic portions 410 on each of the different modules can run their own streams of microcode in synchrony, so that access arbitration can be performed in microcode.
The method that is used can be changed on a per cycle basis.
Once an FP module(s) has been selected, the method of controlling it is split between control registers (loaded with long term control information), and dedicated microcode bits for cycle by cycle control. Most of the cycle by cycle control is concerned with data transfers between the data cache memory interface and the register files on the module, as described below.
The module selection is shown schematically in Figure 23. Multiplexer 2340 selects which input to use for module
ID. Decode logic 2310 (which is part of the CP extension logic in one of the modules 130 or 130') tests the broadcast module address against the switch settings in the particular module. Qualification logic 2320 accordingly qualifies a side variety of microinstruction fields from the local WCS extension 490, as described below.
Control registers
The control processor module 110 can read and write the following registers:
Transfer control register: The transfer control register collects together the control signals that influence the transfer of data from the holding registers 420 (in the data cache memory interface) into the register files 430. A few miscellaneous signals are also included to economize on hardware.
The control sign#als used include:
Transfer start (3) This field specifies which of the 8 registers in the holding register group is to be transferred first. This can also be specified as part of the microcode instruction or automatically based on the data cache memory address that the data originated from.
Transfer length (3) This field specifies the number of words to transfer between the holding register and the register file. Between 1 and 8 words inclusive can be transferred.
Transfer tvpe (1) This bit selects the transfer to be between the holding registers and the register
file (0), or from the holding registers to the FP module's WCS
pipeline register (1). This latter function is used during par
allel loading of the FP's WCS memory.
Loopback control (1) This bit allows the
data in the write holding registers to be copied directly into
the read holding registers without having to be written into
the register file first. The main use of this is for diagnostic
and state save and restore operations.
Operation select (1) This bit has no hard
wired function and can be tested to the FP's sequencer. This
allows the control processor module 110 to tell the FP to do one of two operations within the routine it is currently exe
cuting. For example this bit could be used to specify that the
data at the even address (as opposed to the data at the odd
address) is to be used for the calculation.
Select Instruction Register (1) This bit
forces the Instruction Register (see later) to be used instead
of the microcode instruction field in the WCS to control the
operation of the floating point ALU and multiplier.
Mask Error (1) This bit inhibits an FP error
condition (as determined by the FP microcode) from gener
ating an interrupt in# the control processor module 110's se
quencer. The FP error status can still be tested via the nor
mal condition code~ selection procedures.
Stack position (2) During diagnostics and
state save and restore situations the host computer needs
access to the FP's subroutine stack. When access to the stack
has been enabled this field is used to select which stack en
try to read. Note that the stack entry that is accessed is rel
ative to the location pointed to by the stack pointer.
FP control register: The FP control register
collects together the parallel microcode load controls, inter
rupt masking, clock control and microaddress selection
fields.
Clock control t2) This field allows the con
trol processor module 110 to control the FP's clocks. The FP
clocks can either be running or stopped. The extra bit in the
clock control field was used to select that the FP microcode
clock uses the microcode clock of the control processor mod
ule 110, thus allowing the FP to run synchronously to the
control processor module 110.
FP microcode address source (2) This field
allows the control processor module 110 to select that the
microcode address used by the FP is one of:
FP sequencer output. This is the normal
micro address source when the FP is runn#ing microcode.
Start ~# - Start Address register This selects the start
address register during parallel microcode loading. (A dif
ferent mechanism is used to select the start address register
when the CP module 110 or the host is commanding the FP
module' 130 to start running microcode from a particular
address.)
Force stack output This is used by the con
trol processor module 110 to gain access to the subroutine
stack during diagnostics and microcode debugging.
Interrupt mask (4) These 4 bits allow the control processor module 110 to select on which events in
the FP it is to be interrupted. These events are breakpoint,
CPWAIT, FPWAIT, register file swap, and FP error. Once an
interrupt has occurred the corresponding mask bit is tempo
rary cleared to reset the interrupt request.
Parallel microcode load control (5) This
field includes separate bits to control the WCS write enable,
the WCS output enable, and the diagnostic shift register
mode, clock and serial data in signals. The parallel microcode
load is controlled by the control processor module 110, as is
described in greater detail below.
Floating point serial access loop (3) Run
ning through the floating point ALU and multiplier is a serial loop that can be used to gain access to the internal state of both chips and also to load in some new state information.
All the internal registers and flags can be accessed in this way. To control this serial loop the control processor module 110 has three control signals: serial mode, serial data in and a serial clock. The serial clock is driven directly from this register bit and must be toggled by the control processor module 110 to generate the rising and falling edges required.
Start address register The control processor module 110 loads the start address register with the address of the microcode routine it wants the FP to start running when the jump start address microcode bit is used. This register ##is also used during parallel microcode to hold the address of the WCS location to load.
Instruction register (8 bits) The control processor module 110 "can override the floating point ALU and multiplier instruction from the WCS and substitute its own instruction. The Instruction register 4510 (shown in
Figure 45) holds this instruction. The benefit of this is that the control processor module 110 can customize a generic microcode routine for the particular type. of calculation it requires which leads to a very large reduction in the amount of WCS used for very similar algorithms.
Status register (source only) This is only used for diagnostics and microcode debugging to gain access to some internal information in the FP module. The status that can be accessed includes the register file address and holding register start address used during transfers and the sticky status.
Microcode word format
Key fields of the FP microcode format are generally shown in figure 4D. The microcode word is defined more precisely below. The items marked with a * come directly from the WCS 470, and use the internal pipeline registers of the devices they are controlling. The number of bits per field is indicated in parentheses.
True address (14) This field holds the next address to jump to during normal sequential program execution (i.e. continue instruction), the address to jump to when a conditional test is true and the subroutine address for a jump subroutine instruction.
False address (14) This field holds the next address to jump to when a conditional test is false and the return address for a jump subroutine instruction.
Read address X (9) * This field holds the 9 bits that specify the address in the register files where data is to be read from and placed on the "X" port. The physical address is held in 7 of the 9 bits and the other 2 bits select how the - address is to be modified. The options are no modification (physical), and soft double buffering (either logical or preview).
Read address Y(9) * This field hold the 9 bits that specify the address in the register files where data is to be read from and placed on the "Y" port. The physical address is held in 7 of the 9 bits and the other 2 bits select how the address is to be modified. The options are no naodification (physical), and soft double buffering (logical or preview).
Write address ~8) * This field hold the 8 bits that specify the -address in the register files where data is to be written to. The physical address is held in 6 of the 8 bits, and the other 2 bits select how the address is to be modified.
The options are no modification (physical), soft double buffering (logical), or soft double buffering (preview). The address selects a pair of registers, one at the even address and one at the odd address. The writing of the register(s) is controlled by two separate write enable bits. (This feature allows a result to be duplicated in both the odd and even sides of the register file, as discussed above.) This address is also used for the "loopback" write port which is used to duplicate data in the register file.
Even Write enable (1) * When this bit is active data is written into the even register file address.
Odd Write enable (1) * When this bit is active data is written into the odd register file address.
Floating point operation (8) * This specifies the floati#ng point or integer operation to do and is shared by both the FMPY 440 and the FALU 450. Full details concerning the instruction set and opcodes for the specific parts used can be found in the manufacturer's data sheets.
FMPY enable controls (4) This field controls the internal multiplexing of data and the loading of the input and output registers:
X port multiplexer control (the "X port" is the port connected to the first operand bus 431);
Enable X port register data load;
Enable Y port register data load (the "Y port" is the port connected to the second operand bus 432);
Enable Z register load (the "Z port" is the port connected to the results bus 433);
FALU 450 enable controls (5) This field controls the internal multiplexing of data and the loading of the input and output registers:
X port multiplexer control
Y port multiplexer control
Enable X port register data load
Enable Y port register data load
Enable Z register load
Clock length (4) Defines the instructions cycle length. These range from 28 ns to 98 ns in steps of 7 ns.
FMPY or FALU status select (1) * Selects either the FMPY 440 or FALU 450 to drive the status bus.
Condition code select (5) Selects one of the following conditions to test: force true (default condition)
FPWAIT carry (FALU) divide by zero (FMPY) zero ) negative ) interrupt flag ) not a number (NAN) ) from the FMPY 440 or rounded up ) FALU 450 sticky overflow ) sticky underflow - ) sticky inexact ) sticky invalid operation ) sticky denormalized ) sticky div zero sticky status active
CP option bit
X data valid
Y data valid address last data transferred (i.e., even or odd) microcode loop Breakpoint (1) - Set to indicate that there is a breakpoint set on this instruction.
Set FPDONE (1) Sets the FPDONE status flag in the control processor module 110 interface to tell the control process#or module 110 that the calculations have been com pitted.
Swap (1) Requests that the soft double buffer in the register file be swapped over. The swap doesn't happen until both the control processor module 110 and floatingpoint processor module 130 have requested the swap.
Scratchpad control (3) This field controls the operation of the scratchpad memory and its address counter.
One bit is the write enable for the scratchpad memory, and
the other two bits select the address counter operation out of:
load
increment
decrement
hold
Results bus output select (2) This field selects the
source that drives the results bus 433. The possible sources
are:
FALU
FMPY 440
Scratchpad memory data
Scratchpad memory address
Stack control (2) The stack control field controls
the subroutine stack logic so that the return addresses are:
pushed, popped or held.
Loopback write enable e This bft enables a
write cycle in the register file 430, through the loopback
port 430E. This copies whatever data is on first operand bus
431 into the address specified for the write port 430D. The
odd and even write enables select which bank of the register
file 430 the data is written to, or whether it is written to
both.
Sticky status control (2) This field selects
whether the status generated in this cycle is to be incorpo
rated into the sticky status, the sticky status is to be cleared
or is to be held.
Double precision data transfer (2) These two bits
control the multiplexing of data into the X and Y input reg
isters in the FALU 450 and FMPY 440, and the multiplexing
of the double precision result out from the Z port.
Use old A6: This bit is set by the microcode as
sembler when the most significant address bit to the register
files for all the ports remains the same over adjacent cycles.
This is used to reduce the cycle time for these situations.
SamDle program flow
Following is a short sample program (a multiply rou
tine) in pseudo-code. This example will help to show how
the innovative features provide efficient execution.
The operation of this example is also shown schemati
cally in Figure 42. In this example, it should be noted that:
Instructions grouped together within curly
brackets () are executed in parallel.
Normally 8 multiplies would be done per pass
through the routine. However, this has been cut down to 4 to
shorten the routine.
The double buffering is transparent to the mi
crocode.
The calculation performed is C[n] = A [ n ] * B [ n ]
where n is in the range 0...3, and the 8 operands and 4 re
sults are at unique addresses in the register file. Note that a
(prime) on one of these references indicates that the oppo
site of the corresponding element, i.e. the element which is
on the other side of the double buffer before the buffers are
swapped.
There is a three stage pipeline: read operands from the register file, do calculation, write result back to
register file.
The control processor module 110 clears FPWAIT
which starts the floating-point processor module 130 run
ning the routine.
The multiply routine is as follows: MUL1: (Test FPWAIT, if false jump to MULl, else continue)
MUL2: (Read A [ 0 ] and B [ 0 ] from register file,)
MUL3: (Read A [ 1 ] and B[1] from register file,
Do calculation, result R [ 0 ] = AFO ] * B [ 0 ] ,)
MUL4: (Read A [ 2 ] and B[2] from register file,
Do calculation, result R [ 1 ] = A[1] *
Write value of result R [ 0 ] into register file at C [ 0 ] ) -- (Read A[3] and B [ 3 ] from register file,
- Do calculation, result R[2] = A [ 2 ] *
Write value of result R [ 1 ] into register file at C[1],
Test FPWAIT, if true jump to MUL5, else continue)* -- {Do calculation, result#R [ 3 ] = A[3] *
Write value of result R[2] into register file at C[2]
Test FPWAIT, if true jump to MUL6 else continue)*
-- (Write value of result R[3] into register file at C[3]
Set FPDON1E and swap buffers
Test FPWAIT flag, if true jump to MUL2 else jump
to MUL1)
MULS: (Read A' [ 0 ] and B' [ 0 ] from register file,
Do calculation, result R [ 3 ] = A[3] * B' [ 3 ] , Write value of result R [ 2 ] into register file at C [ 2 ] ) (Read A' [ 1 ] and B'[1] from register file, Do calculation, result R' [ 0 ] = A' [ 0 ] * B' [ 0 ] ,*' Write value of result R[3] into register file at C[3]
Set FPDONE and swap buffers,
Jump to MUL4)
MUL6: (Read A' [ 0 ] and B' [ 0 ] from register file,
Write value of result R[3] into register file at C [ 3 ]
Set FPDONE and swap buffers,
Jump to MUL3)
FP vector multiply routine (in pseudo code)
There are several points to note about this routine:
The routine is heavily optimized to keep the FPU busy on every cycle (providing there is data for it).A sim pler, less efficient, version would not include the instructions
MULS and onwards.
To extend this to multiply 8 pairs of numbers, the instruction at MUL4 would be repeated 4 times with different register addresses.
In order to keep the FPU operating on every cycle it is necessary to access data from the other side of the double buffer without having to do a swap. This is used in instructions MULS and onwards.
No time is wasted in synchronizing with the control processor module 110 providing the next set of data is available (i.e. FPWAIT is false).
Debug hardware The debug hardware on the floating-point processor module 130 is much more limited than that included in the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120, because the microcode that runs here is very much simpler. Also, any debug hardware must not degrade the cycle time.
Access to the register file is provided through the local transfer bus 422, so it can be read and written by the. monitor microcode. The FMPY 440 and FALU 450 have built in serial scan logic, which permits their internal pipeline registers and status/mode registers to be accessed. The next microcode address can be read by the control processor module 110, by accessing the start address register 479.
The breakpoint logic uses a bit in the microcode word to define a breakpoint. When an instruction is encountered with the breakpoint bit set, the clock generator is halted and the breakpoint status signal in the control processor module
110 interface is set. To continue from a breakpoint, the con
trol processor module 110 clears the breakpoint input into
the clock generator. Once sufficient internal state has been
saved immediately after the breakpoint, the control proces sor module 110 starts some floating-point processor module 130 microcode running (via the start address register mechanism) to gain access to the indirect access status and the scratchpad memory.
The microcode can only be single stepped by setting the breakpoint bit on every instruction within the routine to single step.
Another feature supporting the debug capability is that the subroutine stack can be read.
Application;(: ustomized Processor Module 130' Figure 9A shows a general overview of a numeric accelerator subsystem including an - application-customized numeric processing module 130' (also referred to as an "algorithm accelerator"). By using the powerful control tools provided, the control processor 110 can control a combination of one or more numeric processing modules 110 with one or more algorithm accelerators 130'.
It can be particularly advantageous to combine a general-purpose floating-point unit 130 with one or' more algorithm accelerators 130'. In such a combined system, the design of the algorithm accelerator 130' can be freed from the constraints of the need -for general-purpose floating-point operations. Therefore, the algorithm accelerator can be designed to be highly application-specific if desired.
One particularly advantageous combination may be to include a complex arithmetic module as one of the modules
130'.
Preferably the application-customized processor is an application-customized numeric processor. However, the application-customized processor could optionally (and less preferably) be of a more exotic variety, such as a symbolic processor (i.e. a processor which has the extra data paths needed to run LISP or PROLOG with high efficiency), or a neural network machine.
The control of multiple numeric processor modules
130 (including algorithm accelerators 130') is discussed below.
FFT Accelerator Module
Figure 9B schematically shows how the architecture of one example of an algorithm accelerator 130' differs from that of a general-purpose floating-point module 130.
The module shown is particularly optimized to run discrete integral - transform operations. For example, this module is particularly fast at executing the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm. An example of the execution of this algorithm will be reviewed below.
In the embodiment of Figure 9B, the register file 910 is even more highly multiported than register file 430. Register file 910 includes four read ports and four write ports, as well as a wide bidirectional port 910A which interfaces to the cache bus 144.
The four lines shown as read ports 910B are actually replicated. Since the multiplies performed will typically not be random multiplies, but will be multfplication with a coefficient (which changes less frequently than the data words), only one complex word of input is needed per cycle for most of the cycles. (However, this is not true in the final cycle.).
The four multiply units 920 can be integer or floatingpoint units. They are most preferably similar to the multiplier 440 described above, but of course other calculation units could be substituted. These units will hold the coefficients in registers, until they are commanded to read new coefficients.
Thus, the four multipliers 920 and adders 930 configure a full complex multiplier 911. The complex multiplier 911 is pipelined with two complex adders 912.
The inputs to the two complex adders 912 include not only the outputs of complex multiplier 911, but also data from read ports 910C, fed through delay block 940. (This delay block can optionally be used to share ports 910B and 910C on the register file 910.) The outputs of the complex adders is connected to write ports 910D.
Thus, this structure permits butterfly calculations to be pipelined very efficiently.
Data Cache Memorv Module 140
The data cache memory provides a large amount of high bandwidth storage. The storage capacity currently is 2
Mbytes, and the bandwidth is 320 Mbytes per second. This memory is multi-ported, to allow data transfers with the outside world to occur in parallel with the floating point calculations. This helps prevent the calculations from occurring in a "stop-start" fashion, with the floating-point processor module 130 standing idle for long periods.
Figure 5 shows key features at the data cache memory module 140. Central to this module is a large block of memory 510. In the presently preferred embodiment, this memory block 510 is configured as 8 single-in-line modules, each containing eight 32Kx8 SRAMS, for a total of 2 megabytes of memory. However, it will be readily recognized by those skilled in the art that the memory implementation could be changed, in accordance with the changing availability of advanced semiconductor parts and the demands of a particular application.
In particular, it is contemplated that for some applications it may -be advantageous to have significantly more memory. Note that the by-256 configuration preferably used for this memory bank -510 means that the address space is used economically, at least for fully parallel accesses. Thus, in the presently preferred embodiment 24 bits of address information are provided to the memory bank - 510 at address input 511. Note# that the write enable input 512 is actually 8 bits wide, so that individual 32-bit words, within one 256-bit block of memory, can be selected for writing.
This is advantageous, as will be discussed below. The data port 513 is 256 bits wide. Note that the functionality of block 510 does not yet provide the multiport capability characteristic of module 140 as a whole. The logic for implementation of this multiport capability, and for accessing the memory bank 510, will now be described.
At the bottom of Figure 5 are seen the 32-bit wide
data buses which connect to the control processor 110 (CD
bus 112) and to the data transfer processor 120 (the TD bus
122). Each of these buses is first fed into a holding register
bank 560. Each of the register banks 560 contains eight 32
bit wide registers 561 in parallel. (In the presently pre
ferred embodiment, these registers 561 are each actually
configured using four 74ALS652 devices, configured to pro
vide a write holding register 561' in parallel with a read
holding register -561"; The structure of the register sets
560A, 560B, and 420 is further shown in Figure 24.)
When the memory bank 510 is accessed, an address
must be provided at port 511.This address will be provided
through'- multiplexer 520, from either the CA bus 111 (which
carries addresses originated by the control processor) or the
TA bus 121 (which carries addresses originated by the data
transfer processing module 120). A select input 521 chooses
which of these inputs is to be provided to the address port
511.
The select signal 521 to the multiplexer 520 is gener
ated by arbitration logic 530. This simple logic grants access
to the DTP module 120 only if the DTP is requesting access and the CP is not requesting access. The select signal 521 is
provided not only to address multiplexer 520, but also to
write mask multiplexer 530, and to DTP transfer logic 540.
As will be discussed below, the write mask input 512
is very advantageous during writes from the TD bus 122 or
the CD bus 112. Since the write enable input 512 has 8 bits
of resolution, the eight 32-bit words in each block of mem
ory 510 can be separately enable for writing during a single
fully parallel write operation. Thus, for example, when the
control processor 110 wants to write less than eight words
into one row of memory bank 510, the registers of 561 #for the desired word positions will be loaded up with the de
sired data value.In addition, 8 bits will be provided on write mask line 551, to indicate which of the registers 561 contain information which should be written into the corresponding words of memory bank 510 at the row indicated by address 511 (from the CA bus 111). (As noted above, transfer of an address from the CA bus 111 into the multiplexer 520 is controlled by the output of the IPU 340.)
Figure 25 provides a different view of the write mask logic. In this figure the FP write mask logic 2510, CP write monitor logic 2520, and DTP write monitor logic 2530 are broken out as three separate blocks, which provide inputs to multiplexer 530. Figure 26 provides a more detailed view of the workings of the write monitor logic blocks. Inputs to the logic 2610 include Register Select, Write All, Write DCM, and
Load Holding Register. The output is eight flag bits, registered in register 2620.
The transfer logic 540 is driven by microcode instruction fields 542, which are part of the microcode instruction sequence within the data transfer processor 120. Similarly, the CD transfer logic 550 is driven by microcode instruction bits 552, which are part of the microcode instruction driven by the sequencer 210 of the control processor module 110.
(In fact, some of the microcode driven by this sequencer is preferably distributed. That is, some of the fields 'of the microinstruction are stored separately from the control store 220, but are clocked by the series of microinstruction addresses 211 which are the outputs of the sequencer 210.
This provides substantial advantages in the system context, and will be discussed below.)
The other outputs 543 and 553 of the transfer logics 540 and 550 include such control functions as control of the respective register banks 560, including clocking and output enable. (Note that each of the register banks 560 has two output enables, for the two sides of the register bank, and two sets of clocks. Note also that one of the functions con trolled by the CP transfer logic 550 is the output enable line 514 of the memory bank 510.)
It will be noted that there is no direct input from the
FP module 130 to request access to the cache bank 510. This is because such accesses are controlled by the control processor module 110. This surprising twist turns out to yield significant advantages, as will be described below.
M em orv configuration
The accelerator subsystem uses a wide memory architecture. On each access to the data cache memory 140, 256 bits are read or written. This represents 8 floating-point words per cycle.
The data cache memory 140 is tri-ported to the control processor module 110, floating-point processor module 130, and data transfer processor module 120, but because the control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130 accesses are controlled by control processor module 110 microcode the arbitration and address multiplexing only needs to be done two ways.
Data ports
There are three ports into the data cache memory. The port to the FP module(s) is 256 bits wide, and the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120 each see respective 32 bit wide ports. The data routing and storage for the 32 bit wide ports is included as part of the data cache block 140.
The multiplexing of the 256 bits of data from the memory array onto one of the 32 bit busses is implemented with 32 bidirectional registers, arranged as 8 groups of 4 registers. Each group stores 32 bits (i.e. one floating-point word) in the read direction and 32 bits in the write direction and is called a holding register. The more specific naming of each register is read holding register and the write holding register as seen from the processor sides of the interface.
When data is read from the memory array, all 256 bits are stored in the holding registers, and the output enables of these registers are controlled to select the required floatingpoint word onto the 32 bit port.
When data written to the memory array only those registers that have been updated from -the 32 bit port are stored. This is controlled by the write mask logic and is achieved by using 8 write enables, one per group.
Both 32 bit ports have identical data routing and storage logic.
The 256 bit port to the floating-point processor module 130 module contains similar logic to the 32 bit ports, but is located on the floating-point processor module 130 module. To allow future expansion of the data cache memory, using modules, the address bus (24 bits) and write enables (8) are taken to the module connectors 3810 (shown in Figures 38A and 38B.)
CP transfer logic The CP transfer logic is responsible for the transfer of data between #the CP holding registers (or the FP holding registers) and the data cache memory.
The data in the holding registers is accessed when the
CD source microcode field selects the read holding register.
The least significant 3 bits of the CP address bus selects the 32 bit word to drive onto the bus. During this process the data cache memory isn't used but it could be accessing the next set of data if necessary.
To write data into the write holding registers, the CD destination microcode field selects the holding registers as a group, and the least significant 3 bits of the CP address bus
CA 111 select the 32 bits to update. When a write holding register is updated, a corresponding write flag is set. There fore, when a write to the data cache memory is done, only the holding registers that have been updated by the control processor module 110 are actually written into the memory array. Those words in the memory array for which the corresponding holding register had not been updated are not changed. The write flags are all reset when the data cache memory is written to (if the data source is the control processor module 110).If the control processor module 110 had been updating one of the write holding registers during the same cycle that it had been writing into the data cache memory, then that write flag bit would remain set.
Sometime it is advantageous to by-pass this selective write mechanism, for example when clearing memory to a constant# value. In this case the control processor module 110 can override the selective writing, and force all words to be updated. Without this selective write capability the write operation of thé data cache memory would be very slow, and would involve: reading the block of data (256 bits) into the read holding registers, transfer the words that were not to change to the write holding registers, update the write holding register(s) with the new data, and then do a data cache write cycle. In the current architecture the copying of data from the read holding registers to the write holding registers would take one cycle per word.
The state of the write flags can be extracted non-destructively by the control processor module 110, for the purposes of state save during microcode debugging.
The read holding registers are separate from the write holding registers so multiple read cycles can be done without disturbing the contents of the write holding registers, and vice versa.
To control the transfer of data between the holding register sets and the data cache memory the following microcode bits are used:
Data cache access (1) This bit is active whenever an ac
cess to the data cache memory is required by the control
processor module 110 for its own use or to transfer data to
or from the floating-point processor module 130. The access
flag is not pipelined. Therefore, arbitration with the data
transfer processor module 120 data cache requests can be
sorted out before the start of the cycle the request happens
on.
Data cache write enable (1) This bit generates a write
cycle in the data cache memory.
. Data cache write all (1) This bit overrides the normal
write enable~ gating that allows selective updating of words
in the data cache #memory and forces them all to be written.
This is useful when setting blocks of memory to a constant
value.
Data cache port select (1) This bit selects either the FP
module holding registers or the control processor module
110 holding registers to be the source or destination for a
data cache transfer.
There are three bits in the mode register that control
the holding registers. Two bits select whether the holding
registers are to be used or by-passed. The - third bit disables the data cache memory from driving the DCM data bus so a
loopback data path can be set up between the write holding
registers and the read holding registers. These facilities are
only present so the state save and restore microcode can
gain access to the write holding registers without forcing a
data cache memory write operation first and also more pre
cise diagnostics.
The control processor module 110 can use the data
cache memory in two ways:
The first way is to ignore the wide memory ar
chitecture and treat it as if it were just 32 bits wide. To do
this, the CP module 110 simply requests an access cycle
prior to every read access and after every write access. Us ing this method, the data cache memory can be regarded as just a memory with pipelined data accesses. This method simplifies using the the data cache memory, but does not make efficient use of the memory's ability to service the data transfer processor module 120 port. This method also introduces inefficiencies when the control processor module 110 is accessing sequential data. However, for non-sequential data accesses the next method cannot be used in any case. so this first method must be used.
When the control processor module 110 is doing sequential memory accesses, it takes it 8 cycles of reading or writing to all the holding registers 561 for each access to the memory bank 510. The data cache memory access can be pipelined up with the holding register accesses, so 7 out of 8 cycles are free for data transfer processor module to use.
The data cache memory access does not occur automatically, so the microcode to specify an access cycle every 8 cycles.
This type of transfer is more likely to occur in the data transfer processor module 120, because I/O -transfers to or from the external interfaces will normally be sequential in nature.
The control processor module 110 is also responsible for transferring data between the data cache memory and the holding registers on the FP module. In this case the basic control is the same except for determining which words within a block to update during a write to the data cache memory. In this instance a different approach is taken to the write flags as described above.
The differences arise because of several factors:
o The transfer logic that governs the data flow
between the FP's register file and the holding registers have
some limitations so the more general write mask generator
used in the control processor module 110 is not necessary.
o The normal data transfers from the FP's register
file are usually blocks of data (i.e. part of a vector) and as
this happens in a single transfer cycle a number of the write mask bits must be set in parallel rather than individually as in the case of the control processor module 110.
o The one FP write mask generator must cope with multiple FP modules.
The FP write mask is generated by specifying the word to update and the# number of consecutive words from the first word. The start p#osition is supplied by the least significant 3 bits of the CP address and the length is held as a field in the microcode instruction.
DTP transfer logic 540
The data transfer processor module 120 transfer logic is responsible for the transfer of data between the data transfer processor module 120 data bus (TD bus 122) and the memory array. It is very similar to the CP transfer logic except:
The parts associated with the fibating-point processor module 130 are missing.
The output signals are qualified by the results of the arbitration logic. - ArbitratThn logic 535
The arbitration logic determines who has access to the data cache memory on a per cycle basis. The two competing ports' are the CP/FP and the data transfer processor module 120. The CP/FP has priority over the data transfer processor module 120 so the data transfer processor module 120 is made to wait for a free memory cycle. The data transfer processor module 120 can force the control processor module 110 to inject a free memory cycle by interrupting the control processor module 110.
The arbitration of the data cache memory has been simplified by both port's access requests (or demand in the CPIFP case) being synchronous. This has been achieved by sharing the same clock generator between the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120.
Without this degree of synchronization, the control processor module 110 could never assume it had access during a cycle, because the data transfer processor module 120 might have just started an access.
The cycle by cycle arbitration is done in the arbitration logic. The arbitration logic takes two request signals: CP request and DTP request. Both these are microcode bits that are asserted whenever that port accesses the data cache memory. These microcode bits are non-registered so that the arbitration can be sorted out on the cycle before the access occur. This allows enough time for the data transfer processor module 120 grant signal to be tested by the data transfer processor module 120 sequencer without incurring an extra cycles delay due to the pipelining of the sequencer 5 FLAG input.
The two output signals are the dtp~grant signal, which informs the data transfer processor module 120 that it has access to the data cache memory, and a signal that controls the address -and write enable multiplexers.
The CP/FP accesses the data. cache memory as if it were a single ported device. The data transfer processor module 120 however must go through the following procedure every time it requires access. This procedure is written in pseudo code.
( do some writes to the holding registers
WAIT: ( request write access to data cache memory
if access failed jump to WAIT else continue ) ( do some other work )
Some points to note regarding this example are:
This logic helps to maintain a large amount of work going on in parallel.
If the access failed, then the write (or the loading of the holding registers on a read access) is automatically inhibited.
The result of the test indicates whether the access was successful or not. If it was not then the data transfer processor module 120 tries again by looping on the accessing instruction.
This example has shown the data transfer processor module 120 waiting until access is granted. However, it would normally wait only for a certain number of cycles.
If access still had not been granted, the DTP module would then interrupt the control processor module 110. During the few cycles the control processor module 110 takes to service the interrupt the data cache memory would be free for the data transfer processor module 120 to access.
Command Mem orv 190
The command memory 190 provides communication between the control processor module 110 and the data transfer processor module 120. Both have equal access to this memory. Dual port RAMs are used in the presently preferred embodiment.The command memory is 32 bits wide by' 2K deep.
Figure 15 shows some significant features of the organization of this memory. The operation of the command queues is described in detail below, with reference to Figure 15, where the processor interface between the CP module and the DTP module is discussed. However, some key features of the organization of this memory will be noted at this time.
These dual port RAMs allow unrestricted access by both ports when the two addresses are different. If the two addresses are equal, and if both sides are writing, then the result is undefined. As discussed below, the communication protocol between the two processors is arranged so that both
never need to write to the same address. Therefore no arbi
tration is necessary.
The use the control processor module 110 and data
transfer processor module 120 make of the command mem
ory is governed by software. In the presently contemplated
best mode, the allocations will include:
command queue to the CP module 110 (e.g. about 12%
of memory space);
command queue to the DTP module 120 (e.g. about
38% of memory space);
state save and restore data structure (e.g. about 50% of
memory space).
The state save and restore data structure is reserved
for use by the microcode debug monitor, to hold the control
processor module 110 and floating-point processor module
130 state information (as well as some command structures).
Host - Interface Logic 160
Figure 6 shows principal components of the host
interface logic, which is generally shown as block 160 in
Figure 1. In the preferred embodiment, the system bus is a
VME bus, and therefore this interface logic is often referred
to in the present disclosure as the "VME Interface." However,
as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, a wide variety of other system busses could be used instead, and the
disclosed innovations can readily be adapted to such
systems.
A bus controller 650 interfaces to the VME bus ser
vices lines, to provide such interface signals as bus grant,
bus request, reset, etc.
The interrupt logic 680 is used for interrupt handling,
to send interrupts to the host. (These interrupts will go out
on the VME bus services lines 600B.) In the presently pre
ferred embodiment, this is implemented using a PAL, as de
scribed below.
In addition, a DMA controller 640 is also preferably pr#ovided. This provides low level control of data handling between the VME bus and the FIFO 670, without supervision of all intervening steps by the data transfer processor 120.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the DMA controller is configured using a PAL, as described below.
The VME interface provides four main services to the host processor:
Microcode loading via a serial scan loop interface to the three types of processor modules.
Command instigation and status monitoring.
Data transfer to/from the VME address space
using DMA access to the host memory so the subsystem can
transfer its own data.
Debug (hardware and software) facilities.
The internal connections of this interface logic include:
the TD bus 122, for data;
the TA bus 121, for address information;
the CP microaddress bus 211B;
the DTP microaddress bus 311B;
the serial microinstruction loop 225; and numerous interrupt and status lines.
The external connections, in this embodiment, are to a
VME bus. The lines of this bus are depicted separately, in
Figure 6, as address lines 600A, data lines 600B, and bus
services lines (including status and control lines) -600C.
The presently preferred embodiment conforms to the
electrical definitions in the VME interface specification,which
has been promulgated as IEEE standard P1014/D1.2, and as
IEC 821. The interface block 160 will accept 32 or 24 bit ad
dresses and 32 or 16 bit data. In the presently preferred
embodiment, some minor limitations have been imposed on
the type of accesses available, to keep the addressing and data routine simpler.
Alternatively, a wide variety of other bus configurations could be used instead. For example, VersaBus, Future
Bus, Multibus II, or NuBus could be readily designed into the system if desired. For very high-speed computing systems, it might be advantageous to use optical busses, using modulated solid-state lasers on optical fibers.
Interface to Physical Lines of Bus
The logic blocks which interface most directly to the
VME bus will be described first. Other logic and memory blocks will be described thereafter. The register block 612 will be described last; the description of this register block contains a wealth of detailed information which further clarifies #the operation of the other blocks.
Bus Controller 650
Bus controller 650 interfaces to the bus services lines 600C, and also receives an output from board address decoder 652 which indicates whether this particular board is being addressed.
The decoder 652 is constantly watching the board-address lines of the VME bus to provide this decode output.
The address of the subsystem, as specified by the host system, is set by the user at installation, using DIL switches.The actual decoding of the address and function codes is done in
PALs, so the subsystem can be configured to fit into the target VME system easily.
The bus controller 650 provides enable signals to the bidirectional data buffer 620 or the bidirectional address buffer 630, in accordance with the VME control protocols.
The bus controller 650 is also connected to receive status information from the DMA controller 640 and the
VME interrupt logic 680 (and also from other logic blocks, as will be described in detail below). The bus controller 650 is also connected to send control signals to the DMA controller 640, the VME interrupt logic 680, and to many other blocks (as will be described in detail below). Since the status and control connections of the bus controller 650 are extensive, they are not all separately shown, to avoid possible confusion. However, their connections will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art.
In the presently preferred embodiment, this is implemented as a VME bus controller device (Signetics SCB68172).
This handles all the bus protocols, including arbitration for the master interface and bus error cycles.
Master and Slave Modes
The VME interface can be considered as two fairly separate interfaces: a slave interface and a master interface.Implementation of the master mode is described below, with, reference to the DMA controller 640.
The slave mode is implemented using slave address decoder 632. When the accelerator subsystem is operating in slave mode (as shown by VME commands decoded by bus controller 650), the controller 650 puts the bidirectional buffers 630 in a pass-through mode, and enables the slave address decoder. The slave address decoder then decodes the address brought in from the VME address lines 600A, and enables the appropriate devices. Again, since the outputs of the slave address decoder are widely connected, they are not separately shown.
The slave address decoder also contains the necessary
DTACK generation logic, to comply with VME protocols.
Under the VME protocol, the current bus master addresses a board, and that board can only respond in slave mode, because only one active master is allowed at any one time. (There can be many masters waiting to be granted access to the bus and hence become active.) The master then waits until the slave responds with DTACK (data transfer acknowledge) to say it has taken the data (write operation) or has provided the data (read operation).
Data Buffer 620
This is a bidirectional buffer, which provides direct interface to the VME data lines 600B.
Address Buffer 630
This is a bidirectional buffer, which provides direct interface to the VME address lines 600B.
VME Interface Memorv 660
This memory provides a significant block of storage in the interface 160. A number of uses of this are described above, in connection with the operations of the DTP module 120. Memorv mao Each accelerator subsystem uses 8K bytes of VME address space. The base address of this address space is selected by 8 switches. The register addresses are given as an offset from this base address. The memory map for the accelerator subsystem can be broken into 2 areas:
A memorv area which is 2K by 32 bit words in size. The usage of this memory area is controlled by software. Some of the data structures which this area will typically co#ntain will be mentioned.
A register area which occupies the bottom portion of the memory space. This area is used for many important functions, as will be explained in detail below.
The memory area is shared between the microcode debugger and the normal run time interface:
The debugger area will contain the state save information of the subsystem, as well as a command queue which permits the the monitor microcode to read memory,
FIFOs etc.
The run time interface consists mainly of a command queue that the device driver can add to and the blitz microcode remove commands from.
There are several restrictions in how the hardware can be accessed. These restrictions are imposed primarily to keep the hardware simple, while still allowing 16 or 32 bit data bus interfaces.The restrictions are:
Byte accesses are not supported;
16 bit accesses must occur on long word (32 bit) boundaries.
The memory 660 and the data FIFO 670 are 32 bits wide. If the host system is a 16 bit system, the top 16 bits are not accessible. For a 16 bit system to write to consecutive addresses in the memory, the address must be incremented by 4 to move onto the next location.
The VME memory map used by the preferred subsystem is:
Register Offset Width
Control -register 0 1 6 read/write
Strobe buffer 4 1 6 write
Status register ' ' 4 8 read
WCS control register 0 8 1 6 read/write
WCS control register 1 12 8 read/write
WCS data register 16 16 read/write
CP microaddress 20 1 6 read/write
DTP -microaddress 24 6 read/write
Data FIFO 28 3 2 read & write
IF memory 660 4096 32 read/write
Data FIFO 670
The data FIFO 670 provides an important capability in the data transfer operations.
In the normal mode of operation the data FIFOs are never accessed by the host, because the DMA controller uses them exclusively. The host can gain access to them by clearing the FIFO access bit in the control register.
The block shown as FIFO 670 is physically implemented as two FIFOs, to gain the functionality of a bidirectional FIFO. One of these FIFOs is read by the host and the other is written by the host. The other ends of the FIFOs are accessed by the DTP. (Thus, in general, if the host reads the
FIFO after having written to it, the read data would be different-- from the written data.)
When the host is accessing the FIFOs it must monitor the FIFO status, to ensure that FIFO is never read when empty or written to when full. (The host might need to access these FIFOs for diagnostics, or if polled I/O rather than
DMA was required.)
VME Interrupt Logic 680
The VME protocol provides for a number of interrupts.
These interrupts can be triggered by the DTP module 120.
The DTP module 120 also defines the interrupt vector.
The vector can be changed depending on the reason for the interrupt. or a single vector can be used, with the cause(s) of the interrupt held in the VME interface memory 660.
DMA Controller 640
Sequential or block mode transfers, between data FIFO
670 and the VME bus, are supported by the DMA controller
640. (This controller also supports the more usual single word transfers.) The DMA address is the full 32 bits, and the
VME address modifiers and LONG* signals used during a
transfer are all set up by the DTP module 120 in registers
before the transfer starts.
The opposite side of the the FIFO 670 is filled or emp
tied by the DTP module 120 (normally into the data cache
memory 140). When 16 bit transfers are used, the DTP mi
crocode packs/unpacks the data to/from the 32 bit internal
format.
This part is referred to as a DMA controller by analogy,
in that it can perform block data transfers to and from the
FIFO 670 in response to a single high-level command from
the DTP module 120. However, the functioning of this logic is
not quite the same as that of commercially available DMA
controller chips. Normal DMA controllers will get their data
and address information fro#m the same bus as the one they
use for DMA access when active. However, the DMA con
troller 640 receives its address information from the DTP
module 120, and uses this information to control the address
and data interface to the VME bus.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the DMA
controller 640 is actually implemented using four Am2940
DMA bit slice chips, with some associated logic in PALs as
discussed below.
The setup of the DMA controller is done by the DTP
module 120, and the data is transferred between the VME
bus lines 600B and the data FIFO 670.
Three addressing modes are available. Which of these
is used will depend on the type of transfer or system config- urati on. - - #- Hold: address constant. This addressing mode
keeps the same VME address for every DMA access to the
VME memory and this is used when accessing I/O ports.
Increment address bv 2 (or decrement). This
addressing mode is used when the VME memory being ac
cessed is only 16 bits wide. In this case the DTP splits or
merges the data between 32 bit words used internally and
16 bits words used externally.
Increment address bv 4 (or decrement). This
addressing mode is used when the VME memory being ac
cessed is 32 bits wide.
Of course, multiple status signals are preferably used to control data handling to the FIFOs, as is well known to those skilled in the art. For example, such status signals would include FIFO empty, FIFO half-full, etc.
Microcode Load Control Logic 610
This logic provides the interface to the microaddress busses 211B and 311B, and to the serial loop 225. (More precisel#y, as shown in Figure 28, this logic provides one serial output line 225A, and receives four return lines 225B, 225C, 225D, and 225D.) The components of this block, and the functions it performs, are discussed in detail below (in connection with the operation of the serial loop interface), with reference to Figures 27, 28, and 29.
Note that this logic must access the CP and DTP microaddress registers in the Register block 612. It also accesses the WCS specifier control register. These registers are shown in register block 612, but could alternatively be regarded as part of the control logic 610.
This block includes a flip-flop 2720, a state machine 2740, a multiplexer 2710, and the WCS data register 2730 (which is a shift register).
Register Block 612
A large number of useful registers are shown collectively as register block 612. The functions and signals included in this block will now be discussed.
Control Register Bits
The host uses the control register to control the basic operations of the subsystem hardware. These mainly include hardware reset functions and clock control. The control bits are:
o CP sequencer reset
This bit when set forces the CP sequencer 210 to jump to address 0, and resets the internal sequencer state.
o DTP sequencer reset
This #bit when set forces the DTP sequencer 310 to jump to address 0 and resets the internal sequencer state.
o DTP reset
This bit when cleared places the DTP in a safe state, so that all the buses are tristated. The main use of this is when loading microcode to prevent bus contention on illegal microcode instructions.
o CP reset
This bit when cleared places the CP in a safe state, so that all the buses are tristated. The main use of this is when loading microcode to prevent bus contention on illegal microcode instructions.
o FP reset
This bit when cleared places the FP in à safe state, so that all the buses are tristated. The main use of this is when loading microcode to prevent bus contention on illegal microcode instruction 5.
o VME FIFO reset
This bit when cleared sets the VME data FIFOs to the .empty state.
o Data Pipe FIFO reset
This bit when cleared sets the Data Pipe FIFOs to the empty state.
o GIP FIFO reset
This bit when cleared sets the GIP interface FIFOs to the empty state, and initializes the GIP interface.
o Free run clocks
This bit controls the CP and DTP microcode clocks, and either allows them to free run or stops them. When the clocks are
stopped they can be single stepped by the host.
o Disable Clocks
This bit disables all the microcode clocks for the CP and DTP except the clock to the pipeline registers. This is necessary to allow the microcode to be read or written without disturbing the state of the CP or DTP, for example when setting breakpoints.
o Free run FP clocks
This bit controls the FP microcode clocks and either allows them-to free run or stop.
o Fifo access
This bit controls the access to the VME data FIFO. The normal option is to let the internal DMA controller have exclusive access and control rights but for diagnostics or in a VME slave only environment the host can take control of these
FIFOs by setting this bit.
o Microcode loop
This bit is only used by the diagnostics to cause a test to repeat itself at the microcode level.
Strobe buffer
The host uses the strobe buffer to control - aspects of the subsystem that are edge or pulse related. If the strobe buffer is written to, then for every bit that is set a corre
sponding strobe line will be pulsed. This automatic strobing
relieves the host from having to toggle a strobe line by first
setting it and then clearing it. This action is used in the write
mode only; if the host reads this buffer, it will receive some
alternative status information back.
The strobe lines are:
Single step: This will single step the CP and DTP mi
crocode clocks through one cycle. This is used when hard
ware single stepping and loading, reading or modifying the
WCS.
FP pipeline clock: The FP pipeline clock signal is only
used as part of the serial microcode loop control when
reading back the contents of the FP's WCS. The run time
pipeline clock in the FP is the same as the normal FP mi
crocode clock.
CP WCS write enable: This signal causes the CP's WCS
220 to be written with the data previously loaded into the
serial loop at the address specified in the CP microaddress
register. This is qualified by the load WCS mask for the parts
of the CP WCS that lie on the FP modules. A similar signal is
used for write enable of the DTP WCS 320.
FP WCS write enable: This signal causes the FP's WCS
470 to b6-Z.wn#en with the data previously loaded into the
serial loop at the address specified in the CP microaddress
register. Note that the CP microaddress register is used. The
writing' into -the WCS 470 is qualified by a load-WCS mask,
so that only the selected-FPs have their WCS updated.
CP debug interrupt: This strobe generates an interrupt
in the CP. This is used by the microcode debug monitor to
force the CP to return to the debug monitor.
DTP debug interrupt: This strobe generates an interrupt in the DTP. This is used by the microcode debug monitor to force the DTP to return to the debug monitor.
DTP interrupt: This strobe generates an interrupt in the DTP. This is used by the device driver to notify the DTP that a command has been loaded into its command queue.
Status register
The status register is read only and it is mainly used to allow the host to determine the VME data FIFO's status when the host has access to them.
The status bits are:
VME output FIFO status: The three status bits that this
FIFO produce are full, half full and empty. These status bits are for the FIFO that the host reads from (if its access is enabled).
VME input FIFO status: The three status bits that this FIFO produce are full, half full and empty. These status bits are for the FIFO that the host writes to (if its access is enabled).
Here: This status bit allows the host to determine if any FP modules are present. To do this it writes each mc ule's address into the WCS control register 1 and tests this status bit. If there is a module at this address then this status bit will be cleared otherwise it will set.
WCS control register
Two registers are used to control the WCS interfaces.
The first one controls the readin#g and writing of the various microcode memories in the CP, DTP and on the FP module.
More detail on the function and use of these signals is included in the section on microcode loading.
The control signals in this register are:
Serial loop output enable: This is the most significant bit of a 3 bit field that selects which branch of the parallel paths of the serial loop is to act as the return path. The other 2 bits of the field are in WCS control register 1.
FP WCS output enable: This bit output enables the data out of the FP microcode memory which needs to be enables for normal microcode execution and microcode readback, but disabled when loading microcode.
FP Pipeline output enable: In the presently preferred embodiment, the FP WCS 470 is split into two banks for optimal microcode loading (as discussed below). The present signal controls the pipeline registers 476 which interface to the output of these two banks.
FP WCS mode: This controls the serial loop mode and selects between shifting data around the loop and the transfer of data to/from the WCS.
CP and DTP pipeline register output enable: This is only used to disable the microcode instruction and "force" all the bits to go high.
CP WCS output enable: This bit output enables the data out of the CP microcode memory 220 which ne ts to be enables for normal microcode execution and mix code readback, but disabled when loading microcode.
A similar signal controls the DTP WCS32(5 soutput en- able.
o CP WCS mode
This controls the serial loop mode and selects between shifting data around the loop and the transfer of data to/from the WCS.
o 0 - DTP WCS mode
This controls the serial loop mode and selects between shifting data around the loop and the transfer of data to/from the WCS.
o CP microaddress select
This forces the CP's sequencer to tristate its address bus and enables the CP microaddress register to drive the bus irl- stead.
o DTP microaddress select
This forces the DTP's sequencer to tristate its address bus and enables the CP microaddress register to drive the bus instead.
o FP microaddress select
This forces the CP microaddress bus to be used as the address source for the FP's WCS. Normally the CP microaddress select has been set up so that the host is supplying the microcode address to the CP and hence the FP.
o FP WCS select
The FP WCS must be treated as two halves when reading because of the data routing imposed by the parallel load feature. This bit selects the lower 64 bits or the upper 40 bits.
o Serial loop return source (2).
The serial loop return path can be selected from one of 4 sources. (It must be set up to select that source when the
WCS contents are read via the serial loop.)
CP internal (on the base board only)
CP external (on the base board and the FP mod; DTP
FP
o Serial loop Mode (2)
These bits control how the serial loop behave when data is written or read from the WCS data register. The options are:
Hold data;
Shift data;
Pulse data
The effect of these are discussed in the seriai microcode load section.
The other register holds the fields to control the loading and reading of microcode on the FP modules. The two fields to control this are:
WCS load mask: Each bit of the mask enables the loading of microcode into the corresponding module. Any number of bits can be set so any like modules can be loaded with the same microcode in parallel.
Serial loop output enable: These are the remaining two
bits that together with the third bit in WCS control register 0 select which one of the modules drives' the CP external re
turn path and the FP return path of the serial loop.
WCS data register
The WCS data register is the register the host reads
and writes -to access the serial loop and hence the microcode
memories. In order to make the microcode loading more ef
ficient this register behaves in different ways depending on
how the serial loop mode field in the WCS control register 0
is set up.
If the serial loop mode is set to "hold" then this regis
ter is read and written like any other register.
If the serial loop mode is set to "shift" then after every
read or write operation to the WCS data register the register is shifted 16 places which inserts the written data into the serial loop and loads the ~"last" word in the loop into the data register.
If the serial loop mode is set to "pulse," then the register is read - and written like any other register, but after the write operation some control signals are automatically generated to control the serial loop.
CP microaddress register
This register holds the data which is to be driven onto the. CP microcode address bus 211B by the microcode load control logic 610-during- microcode loading of the CP or FP modules; If the CP microaddress; select bit is set in the WCS control register 0, then reading this register will return the last data written to it; otherwise an asynchronous snap shot of the address the CP's sequencer is outputting is returned.
DTP m#roaddress register
This register holds the data which is to be driven onto the DTP microcode address bus 311B by the microcode load control logic 610 during microcode loading of the DTP modules. If the DTP microaddress select bit is set in the .WCS control register 0, then reading this register will . return the last data written to it; otherwise an asynchronous snap shot of the address the DTP's sequencer is outputting is returned.
Data Pipe Interface Logic 150
The data pipe concept provides a means for a number of separate accelerator subsystems to be connected in a wide variety of topologies. This connection is done using multiple local busses which are referred to as "data pipes." This connection is independent of the backplane, and can be done over a reasonable distance.
In the presently preferred embodiment, each data pipe local bus supports 32 bit wide transfers at 40 Mbytes per second, and is FIFO buffered at the receiving end. Each subsystem contains two input pipes and one output pipe.
The output pipe has separate clocks, so when it is daisy chained to 2 input pipes the data can be routed to each input pipe individually or together.
The data pipe interface 150 is shown in Figure 7. The data pipe output port 730 is 32 bits wide. This port can be connected to the input port (710 or 720) of the data pipe interface on another accelerator board 4140 (or to a data pipe interface on another device of some other type). The receiving end of a data pipe is FIFO buffered (using FIFOs 740 and 750), so the output 731 just electrically buffers the data. Two strobes 760 are provided, so that one data pipe interface can write to two other subsystems. To prevent data overrun in the receiving subsystem, the FIFO full flags 770 from the receiving system are available to the sending subsystem for monitoring. Two input FIFOs 740 and 750 are provided for the two input ports 710 and 720, so two subsystems can send data to the one receiving subsystem.
The FIFO output enables are controlled by the TD source field in the DTP microcode, and the output strobes are controlled by the TD destination field. The input FIFO's status signals 780 can be tested by the condition code logic, or can generate an interrupt.
Using this interface structure, multiple subsystems can be linked by local busses in a wide variety of topologies.
This ability to do flexible subsystem reconfiguration is particularly advantageous in combination with subsystems as
shown in Figure 1, since an application-customized macro
scopic data transfer architecture can be very advantageous for many applications. Some examples of the topologies are
shown in Figures 34, 35, 36, and 37.
Some algorithms or applications can benefit from a
parallel or pipelined arrangement of multiple subsystems, to
distribute the calculation workload. For example, one exam
ple of a high performance 3D graphics workstation configu
ration is shown in Figure 36.
A straight daisy chain of several subsystems (as shown
in Figure 37) can be used to share data, where the "master"
subsystem 4150A acquires the data from the host memory,
for example, and shares it with all the other subsystems 41 SOB, 4150C, 4150D via the data pipe connections. This will
save on the host bus 4110 bandwidth, because only one subsystem will be fetching the data rather that each one getting
its own copy.
The data pipes could be connected into a ring (Figure
35) to effectively form a token passing network similar in
concept to the Cambridge Ring.
The contents and meaning of the data sent on the data
pipes is under software control, but would normally be mes
sage packets.
The data pipes were designed for inter-subsystem
communication, but they can connect to other peripherals.
While the sustained I/O rate is 40 Mbytes per second, the
burst input rate is much higher. The burst input rate is lim
ited by the electrical aspects of the cabling, but can be as
high as 160 Mbytes per second for one data pipe input (or,
when both inputs are paralleled, up to 320 Mbytes per sec
ond with suitable buffer cards.)
It should be recognized that a key advantage of this
interface capability is the wide variety of subsystem inter
connect topologies which can be used. Therefore, it is partic
ularly important to recognize that the sample configurations
shown are merely illustrative of the great flexibility which is provided.
Picture Processor Interface 170
This interface allows connection to an application-cus
tomized bus. In the presently preferred embodiment, this
bus connects to a picture processor, which is particularly optimized for graphics and image data. In the presently preferred embodiment, this picture bus is a "GIP bus," which has 160 data lines and runs at a data clock period of 120200 ns. (This interface logic is therefore referred to, in numerous places in the present application, as the "GIP interface".) However, other picture data bus standards could (less preferably) be used instead. Alternatively, other application-customized busses could be used, for applications having special data-transfer requirements (such as seismic work, or real-time systems).
The GIP interface allows the GIP and subsystem to pass data and commands to each other. The interface is shown in the block diagram in Figure 8.
All communication between the GIP and the subsystem pass through a 16 bit wide bidirectional FIFO 810. One side of the FIFO is controlled by the DTP microcode, and the other by the GIP microcode. The GIP interface includes a microcode expansion port interface, so the GIP actually runs microcode (8 bits) that is resident on the subsystem. The GIP microcode expansion bus is identical to the DTP microcode expansion interface described earlier.
The GIP interface provides the services necessary for the GIP graphics processors to run some distributed microcode in the sub-system. These services include the GIP microcode clocks, the GIP microcode address and data bus, interrupt and status signals and a means for serially loading
the extension GIP microcode.
The principal components in the GIP interface are the
WCS 830, the bidirectional FIFO 810 (constructed out of unidirectional FIFOs), the status logic 820 and interrupt logic
840.
The resident GIP microcode allow the GIP to perform
the following functions:
o Read or write data from the FIFO 810.
o Test the FIFO status signals via the status logic 820 and drive the result out on the open collector condition code interface signal.
o Set up the conditions that will cause the GIP to be - interrupted (for example, the FIFO becoming full or empty) by the interrupt logic 840.
o Generate an interrupt in the DTP
From the DTP side, the FIFO looks like any of the other
FIFOs except it is 16 bits wide rather than 32 bits wide.
All the details on the format the communication take, and on whether the accelerator subsystem or the GIP is the master device, are totally decided by the microcode running in the two processors. In the 3D workstation environment, as shown in Figure 36, the preferred hierarchy would be the host as master, the graphics subsystem the slave, and the numeric accelerator subsystem in the middle.
Serial Loop Interface
One advantageous part of the concurrent multiproces
sor system shown in Figure 1 (and elsewhere) is a serial loop
interface to the writable control stores (WCSs) of the three
or more processors present. The topology of this loop, in the
presently preferred embodiment, is shown in Figure 28.
(The line shown as 225 in Figures 2A, 3A, 4C, and 6 is broken out, in Figure 28, to show one output line 225A and four return lines 225B, 225C, 225D, and 225E.)
The implementation of the interface to the serial loop has been described above with respect to the various processors individually, and in connection with the VME interface 160. However, some of these features will now be reviewed again, so that the higher-level architecture of the serial loop can be explained more clearly.
Loon Interface to Control - Stores
The serial loop interface provides data access from the host to all of the control stores. To maximize the net bandwidth of this loop, each separate WCS (including the WCS extensions 490j interfaces to the serial loop through a bank of serial/parallel shadow registers.
The shadow registers which interface to FP WCS 470 are shown as registers 481A and 481B in Figure 29 and in
Figure 4C.The shadow registers which interface to CP WCS 220 are shown as registers 222 and 223 in Figure 2A. The shadow registers which interface to DTP WCS 320 are shown as registers 322 and 323 in Figure 3A. The registers which interface to the CP WCS Extension 490 are shown generally as part of the CP extension logic in Figure 4A, but are not shown separately.
Each of these registers can load the instructions into its respective control store,, or clock the instruction stream incrementally, or simply clock the instruction stream along
as fast as possible. Thus, the bandwidth of this line is used
efficiently, and only a minimal number of instructions is re
quired to access control storage for a given processor.
Loon Control
In the presently preferred embodiment, some additional capability is provided for control and routing of the
serial loop, to provide adaptation to the wide range of con
figuration and expansion options.
In the presently preferred embodiment, each subsys
tem can have up to 6 microcoded processors (one control
processor, one data-transfer processor, and as many as four
floating-poin-t processors or algorithm accelerators). Each of
these processors has its own WCS. Each WCS must be written ~to, to load up microcode, and be read from, for diagnostics,
setting breakpoints, etc.
The main features which help provide this capability include:
A return multiplexer: This collects the . serial loop from two internal sources (the control processor and data
transfer processor), and from the two external "return
buses" (for -the microcode of the control processor exten
sions, and 6f the multiple floating-point processors).
The return serial buses which collects the serial
loops from the floating-point processor modules where the
control processor and floating-point processor microcode re
side. A return loop address selects which module drives the
serial return buses.
Each floating-point processor module has a mi
crocode load enable bit so that any combination of modules
can be loaded simultaneously.
The data-transfer processor serial loop expansion is controlled by jumpers and wire links.
With this organization, the protocols to transfer data around the serial loop and backload into the WCS are quite complicated. Such protocols would normally be done in software. In the presently preferred embodiment, the time consuming parts of these protocols have been implemented in hardware, which significantly speeds up the downloading of microcode. As an added benefit, the software overhead has also been reduced.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the host writes (or reads) the microcode, a word at a time, to the data register. (The data register, in this embodiment, is constructed from two universal shift registers. The remainder of the serial loop uses serial shadow registers, such as the
Am29818 made by AMD.) Depending on the serial mode previously selected, one of three things happens: If Ifthe "hold" mode has been selected, then the data transfer behaves just like any transfer to memory.
If the "shift" mode has been selected, then immediately after the read or write cycle ends the .data is data is shifted into (or out of) the serial loop. While this. is happening a busy signal delays further access by the host to the
data register.
If the "pulse" mode is selected, then about 500
ns after the write access the serial data clock is pulsed, to set
the shadow register into the required mode.
Loor, Tonoloev Figure 28 shows the large-scale connections of the se
rial loop.
A single output line 225A is driven by the microcode
load logic 610 in the VME interface 160. (Alternatively, this
does not have to be only a single physical line, but could be
a bus instead, e.g. a four-bit-wide bus.) This line is applied to each of the shadow registers at the periphery of each of the three writable control stores 220, 320, and 470. (Note that the CP WCS extension 490 is not directly connected to the output line 225A, but instead is connected to line 225C, downstream of the primary WCS 220.)
Four return lines are provided, which can be selected by multiplexer 2710. These return lines are primarily useful for debugging.
Note that there is very little "snaking". That is, there are only two cases where the serial output of the serial shadow registers on one WCS is used as input into the interface of - another WCS. In each of these cases the WCS which is downstream in the serial loop is effectively an extension of the upstream WCS. That is, series connections of independent processors in the serial loop are generally avoided. The benefit of this is that the independent microcode programs for different processor modules do not have to be merged together. This helps programmers to take full advantage of the advantageous partition of algorithms discussed above. This also helps to provide faster loading.
This also helps to avoid any problem with merging programs which are targeted for WCSs with different widths and/or depths.
An advantage of the parallelism in the loop topology is that parallel loads can easily be accomplished. For example, if a common sequence of microcode is sought to be loaded into each of the FP modules 130, all of the shadow registers on all of the FP modules can be enabled simultaneously, and each will be loaded in accordance with the serial data on line 225A and the microaddresses on bus 211B.
As may be seen from Figure 28, the loop topology includes multiple parallel branches:
CP branch: Output line 225 is provided as input to the shadow register interface at CP primary WCS 220. The return from the shadow register interface to CP WCS 220 (line 225C) is fed back into multiplexer 2710.
CP Extension subbranch: Downstream of the interface to CP WCS 220, return line 225C is also provided as input to the shadow register interfaces at all of the CP WCS
Extensions 490. The returns from the shadow register interfaces to the WCS extensions 490 are all connected to return line 225D, and thereby fed back into multiplexer.2710.
(Since the returns are connected in parallel, the serial output commands are preferably qualified by an individual module address, to prevent contention on the return line 225D.)
DTP branch: Output line 225 is also connected to provide a serial input to the shadow register interface at
DTP WCS 320. The return from the shadow register interface to WCS 320 (line 225B) is fed back into multiplexer 2710.
DTP Extension subbranch: Downstream of the interface to DTP WCS 320, return line 225B is also made available as an off-board output. This connection can be exploited by users, if desired, to provide DTP extension logic.
The operation of such logic is discussed in greater detail below.
FP branch: Output line 225 is also available as a serial input to the shadow register interface at the WCS 470 on each of the numeric processor modules 130 or 130'. The returns from the shadow register interfaces are all connected to line 225E, and thereby are fed back into multiplexer 2710. (Since the returns are connected in parallel, the serial output commands are preferably qualified by an individual module address, to prevent contention on the return line 225E.)
Figure 27 shows greater detail of the components of microcode loading control logic 610. One important component is the flip flop 2720, which re-synchronizes the return serial data. When the WCS is distributed, controlling the clock skew between the shift register clock and the shadow
registers' D clocks can be very difficult, because of the many
different serial loop configurations.The inclusion of this flip
flop takes care of any clock skew (as long as the skew
doesn't exceed the basic clock period that drives the control
ling logic). State machine 2740 provides D clock outputs, in
response to decoded signals from the host.
Loop Interface to Host
As discussed above with regard to Figures 6 and 27,
the microcode loading control logic 610 can read and write
data onto the X serial loop 225. It can also write and read to
the CP and DTP microaddress busses 211B and 311B.
DTP Microcode Expansion Loon
The presently preferred embodiment also provides the
capability to configure a second serial interface loop, ex
tending off-board. The connection to this loop is shown as
2840 in Figure 28.
Optionally, the DTP module 120 can be extended off
board, by building DTP WCS extensions, somewhat analogous
to the CP WCS extension 490, into additional components.
These WCS extensions provide -microinstruction outputs as selected by -the DTP microaddress bus - 311B. The control of
these DTP extensions is preferably somewhat looser than
that of the CP Extension Logic, since the DTP extensions may
be used in a somewhat wider range of environments. It is
contemplated that the DTP extension logic may be useful for
interface to closely-coupled high-speed I/O devices.
If this expansion option is used, the DTP extensions (if
any are used) are all in series with the DTP itself. This pre
vents contention.
Parallel Microcode Loading
As noted above, the presently preferred embodiment
provides two methods of loading microcode into the floating point processor: either via a serial loop under control of the host, or in parallel under control of the control processor.
The parallel loading of microcode is useful because the amount of writable control storage ("WCS") available on the floating-point processor is limited (4K or 16K instructions).
When there are too many floating-point processor routines to fit in WCS at once, some form of overlaying is necessary.
Using the serial loop to load overlays is not practical, since the host can load instructions slowly (çg. 100 microsecond to 3 ms per instruction, depending on disk accesses).
The parallel load capability provided by the presently preferred embodiment makes use of the very wide data cache memory to hold the entire microcode instruction (currently 104 bits), and transfer it to the floating-point processor write holding registers in one cycle. This is then transferred into the diagnostic shift registers (effi AMD 29818), used for the serial loading, by way of the normal
output port. These devices come with an output port (which
can also be used as an input port if desired) for pipelining of
microcode bits. However, in the presently preferred embodi
ment, this capability is not used, because it is too slow.
(Many of the chips register the microcode bits internally
anyway.) This means that the parallel load route just de
scribed can make use of this capability of the serial parallel
registers, and does' not impose any penalty in speed or func
tionality. The parallel load time is about 500 ns per instruc
tion, which is a significant improvement over the serial load
time.
Another significant point is that the overlaying of mi
crocode in the floating-point processor can be controlled en
tirely by the control processor, without requiring any super
vision by the host. Alternatively, if the microcode overlay is
not already present in the data cache memory, the control
processor can instruct the data-transfer processor to go out
to the host memory and fetch it from there.
In the presently preferred embodiment, each subsystem can have up to 6 w microcoded processors (one control processor, one data-transfer processor, and as many as four floating-point processors or algorithm accelerators). Each of these processors has its own WCS. Each WCS must be written to, to load up microcode, and be read from, for diagnostics, setting breakpoints, etc.
Modular Expansion Options
As discussed in several places above, there are a number -of options for modular expansion of the system shown in
Figure 1. Some of these options will now be summarized, for convenience.
Two types of modules can be connected to the cache bus 144:
The arithmetic processing type, as typified by the floating-point processor module 130, or an algorithm or application accelerator unit 130'.
A High Speed Data (HSD) module, typically used to expand the data cache memory QL to add a high speed I/O channel. This method of expanding the memory is very different from the use of a bulk memory subsystem which in
terfaces to the 'a#celerator subsystem' -via the DTP microcode
expansion bus 2824. The HSD method will support the same
bandwidth as the data cache memory 140, but may not have
as much capacity as the bulk memory subsystem.
The multi-module configuration allows for up to 4
floating-point processor module 130 type modules and 2
HSD modules. These figures have been chosen for mechanical
and electrical reasons rather than any limiting architectural
reason.
The FP 130 modules are selected by the module select
bits. These are normally under control of the control proces
sor module 110, but the VME interface can override them.
This would only be used for downloading microcode or dur ing debugging. The module select bits control every aspect of a module's operation except for resetting (which is controlled by the reset signal).
The HSD module is selected decoding the data cache address bus.
Module connections
The connections to the modules are summarized below.
The list groups the connections into logical area and identifies which of the two types of module would use them.
The connections are made via six 96 way DIN connectors. Figures 40A and 40B show the physical connection configuration of the presently preferred embodiment.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the module connections include:
for Data cache transfers:256 bits of data, 23 bits of DCM address, 8 Write enables, a Holding Register OE bit, a delayed access signal (to extend clock cycles, e.g. accomrho- date slow memories), and a Holding Register CK bit;
for CP interface: 3 bits of CP address, 16 bits of data, 16 bits of CP sequencer address, the CP microcode clock, the CP pipeline clock, and the CP write gate clock, one interrupt line, and one Condition Code;
for microcode loading: separate lines for CP WCS output enable, CP Pipelin#e output enable, CP WCS write enable, CP Mode, CP serial data out, CP serial data in, FP WCS output enable, FP Pipeline output enable, FP Pipeline clock,
FP WCS write enable, FP Mode, FP microaddress select, FP upper/lower WCS select, FP serial data out, FP Serial in, as well as a six bit Serial clock/WCS Load Mask signal, and a 3 bit Serial Loop return select;
generally useful: 3 bits of Module select, and control signals for Reset, Single step, Free run, FP Breakpoint,
Microcode Loop, FP Reset, CP Reset, Here;
DC lines: 21 lines for +5 Volts,6 lines for -5 Volts, and 161 Ground lines.
Every module type has access to all the signals.
Multiple Numeric Processine Modules
As shown in Figure 10, one very useful class of embodiments uses multiple numeric processing modules 130.
In this embodiment, all of the modules 130 are under highlevel supervision by a control processor module 110. The CP module 110 not only performs high-lev#el supervisory tasks, but also directly controls all data transfers to and from the numeric processor modules 130. All of the numeric proces sor--~modulbs are connected in parallel to a cache bus 144.
Each of the numeric processor modules 130 includes a CP
Extension Logic 410, as described above. Data-transfer processor module 120 manages data transfers between the cache 140 and the outside world, as discussed above.
Control of Multiple Processor Modules 130
The very high memory bandwidth between the data cache memory 140 and the numeric processor modules 130 or 130' will, in many cases, allow a number of module#s to be working in parallel withou#t suffering data starvation.
The number of numeric processor modules that can operate usefully -depends very much on the application or algorithm mix. In the presently preferred embodiment, this has been limited to four. This limitation has been imposed primarily for electrical and mechanical reasons. However,
once all the memory bandwidth has been used, there is no
advantage in increasing the number of floating-point proces
sor modules.
Since the numeric processors run autonomously, the
module interface doesn't have to include any protocols for
floating-point processor to floating-point processor
synchronization or data exchange. This keeps the interfaces
very simple, as it removes the need for arbitration.
Preferably an instruction write bus is shared by the numeric and/or application-customized processors. Preferably the most significant address bits are decided according to logic such that any one of the numeric and/or applicationcustomized processors can be addressed individually, all of these processors can be addressed together, or some (but not all) groups of these processors can be addressed together.
That is, the control of multiple floating-point processors needs to take into account the fact that an algorithm might run on any one of the floating-point processors present, or parts of -it might run on some or all of the floatingpoint processors present. This may require defining a long term or short term control relationship between the control processor and the floating-point processor. The control processor can select on a cycle by cycle basis which floatingpoint processor to control or transfer data between, or for a longer term relationship this can be defined more globally.
In the presently preferred embodiment, this is achieved by using a microcode bit that selects on a per cycle basis the control mechanism which defines which floatingpoint processor to use. The control mechanism can be either the use of other microcode bits, or the use of the contents of a register (which would håve been reloaded by the microcode). The bits' in the microcode instruction field can be used for definition in the short term, i.e. on a per cycle basis, while the register defines the long term usage.
Examples of the use of the two modes might be:
Short term - When doing an FFT with 4 floatingpoint processors the control processor will spend a few cycles with one floating-point processor, loading the next butterfly's data and collecting the previous butterfly's results, before moving on to the next floating-point processor to deal with another butterfly.
Long term - When doing a vector add the floating-point processor to use is selected before the vector add routine (in the control processor) is called. This means that the control processor doesn't need to know which floatingpoint processor (or type of floating-point processor) is being used to do the calculations.
Figure 23 schematically shows how the module addresses are decoded. The actual implementation of this decoding is discussed in connection with the FP module 130, above.
Cache -Memorv Expansion
As mentioned above, a large amount of expansion
memory can be directly attached to the cache bus 144. This
is a further advantage of the physical structure and data
transfer protocols used. An example of such a structure is
shown in Figure 43.
Phvsical Lavout
Figures 38A and 38B show key features of the physical
layout of the presently preferred embodiment. Figure 38B is
a daughter board, which is smaller than the main board of
Figure 38A. Figure 38B provides the hardware for a floating point processor module 130 (including the accompanying
control processor extension logic). Figure 38A contains the
data transfer processor 120, the primary portion of control
processor 110, the data cache memory 140, the command
memory 190, and the interfaces 150, 160, 170, and 180. The two boards together provide a complete system like that
shown in Figure 1.
The two boards have an identical pattern of six con
nectors 3810. Since these connectors are male/female, more
boards may be stacked together. For example, the configu
rations shown in Figure 9 and Figure 10 may be achieved by
stacking multiple floating-point modules 130 and/or algo
rithm accelerators 130' together. (However, for future ver
sions, it is contemplated that it may be more advantageous
to use a backplane for these connections. This would give a
more convenient mechanical configuration.)
The connectors 3810 are preferably each 96 pins wide.
Thus, although the full width of the cache bus 144 is routed
through these connectors, there are ample pins to spare.
Expansion memory to enlarge the data cache memory
140 may also be stacked up, using this pattern of connectors.
As noted above, attaching additional expansion memory on
the cache bus 144 provides a relatively large memory space
within a very short access delay over a very high bandwidth
channel. In the presently preferred embodiment, up to 12
Mbytes can be accessed, within 100"ns, at 240 Mbyte/sec.
Figure 38A shows the locations of the largest individ
ual components, and shows the general allocation some
functions in other areas. The board used in this embodiment
is a triple-height Eurocard. The VME interface logic 160 is
generally located at the edge of the board, to minimize
backplane stub length. (The VME interface specification re
quires a short stub length.)
The memory banks 510 are generally located near the
connectors 3810, at the left and right corners shown at the
top of the drawing. The command memory 190 and VME interface memory 660 are also located in this area.
A large portion of the center of the board is taken up
with the CP holding registers 560A and the DTP holding
registers 560B.
The DTP and CP IPUs 340 and 240, the DTP and CP se
quencers 310 and 210, and the CP address generator 230
are all separately shown.
The DTP module's writable control store 320 is gener
ally shown below the connectors 3810 near the bottom left
of the drawing, and the CP module's writable control store
220 is generally shown below the connectors 3810 near the
bottom right. The GIP interface 170, and the DTP microcode
expansion interface 180, are generally shown at the bottom left corner. (This area also contains some DIN connectors, not shown, which provide the physical connection which this logic is available to support.) Similarly, the bottom right corner contains not only the data pipe interface 150, but also its associated connectors.
The daughter board, shown in Figure 38B, is smaller.
(Figures 38A and 38B are not drawn to the same scale.)
The holding registers 420 are nested between the connectors 3810, in the areas shown top right and top left. In between these registers is an ECL neighborhood 3820, where
ECL parts (which tend to have high power dissipation) are located. (In the presently preferred embodiment, the ECL parts include the transfer clock generator 412, and the FP microcode clock generator 480.) The isolation of these parts also helps to minimize the injection of TTL noise into the quieter ECL parts.
It may be seen that the chips used to construct the
Register File 430 are large, as are the ALU 450 and multiplier 440. (In this embodiment, each of these chips is in a pin-grid package.)
The FP module's WCS 470 is generally located in the left middle portion of the Figure. Just below this is the eFP module's next-address logic 477. Note that the scratchpad memory 1610, which the FP module's' control logic can also use for a stack, is physically close to the next address logic 477.
The CP extension logic, which is used to extend the CP microcode for control of each of the daughter boards 130 or 130', is largely located at the bottom edge of the board as shown. In particular, the WCS expansion memory 490 is shown at the bottom left.
It is particularly advantageous to separate the floating-point processor module on a separate subboard. (Note also that, if multiple numeric processor modules are used, each processor module 130 is preferably isolated on its own respective subboard.) The numeric processor modules 130 are particularly likely to generate noise, since they include much high-speed logic, and they are also significantly susceptible to noise, since some of their liens and components use ECL levels.
Moreover, note that the holding registers 420, the local transfer bus 422, the register files 430, and the transfer clock 412 are all located on the subboard. This is advantageous, since the highest-frequency lines are all isolated on a common subboard. This is particularly advantageous in embodiments using multiple numeric processor modules, since some degree of -isolation among the various patches of very high-speed logic is thereby provided.
PAL Implementation
In the presently preferred embodiment, the following
PALs (programmed logic arrays) are used. All of the PALs presently used are TTL. Most are from the 16 and 2t series, but a few others are also used.
However, it will be readily be recognized by those skilled in the art that a wide variety of other implementations could be used instead. The division of functions into hardware blocks be changed, and the hardware implementation for a given group of functions can also be changed.
Many of the - functions presently embodied in PALs could be implemented using MSI logic parts, or as blocks in an ASIC or semi-custom integrated circuit, or by programming VLSI logic chips. However, this implementation is given in great detail here to provide full disclosure of the presently preferred embodiment, to ensure full compliance with the patent laws of the United States.
CP PALs
Following are brief descriptions of some of the most important PALs used in the control processor module 110.
Clock Waveform Generator PAL 250
This PAL generates the timing waveforms used by the
CP and the DTP. As discussed above, four clocks are produced. These each follow one of 4 predefined waveform sequences. The 4 sequences are characterized by different periods, namely 4, 5, 6 and 7 times the input clock period. This translates to 100, 125, 150 and 175 ns, when a 40 MHz oscillator is used, as presently preferred. -The microcode clock and the pipeline clock have identical waveforms, but the microcode clock can be disabled, leaving the pipeline clock running, for microcode loading. The microcode clock is always high for 2 cycles (of the oscillator), and then is low for 2, 3, 4 or 5 cycles, as selected by the cycle length inputs. The cycle length is chosen from the maximum requested by the
CP i2 bits) and DTP (2 bits).Since the cycle length is driven from a pipeline register (although it might better have been designed to be unregistered), the cycle length is sampled at the last possible moment, to give the maximum time for it to propagate around the loop. This timing is more critical than first appears, because the output clocks are active in the cycle immediately following that in which they are generated.
The write-enable gate signal goes low one cycle after the microcode clock goes high, but returns high 1 cycle before the microcode clock does.
The times-two clock runs at twice the frequency the microcode clock does, and its rising edge occurs at the same time there is a the microcode clock edge.
When the write-enable gate signal is low, an input from the VME interface memory 660 is sampled. If this input shows that the memory is busy, the cycle length will be extended until this input changes. This allows a safety margin of access time for memories whose access time may be slowed by access clash, offboard communication, etc. (The busy signal, from the PAL's viewpoint, simply inserts extra cycles when the write gate is low.)
Another input selects whether the clocks free run or are single stepped.
CD Bus Source PAL
This PAL decodes the CP microcode bits that select which source drives the CD bus 112, and drives the output enable lines of the appropriate device. Whenever any 16 bit source is selected (such as address generator 230), this PAL also outputs a signal to activate the sign/zero extend PAL 216. When a reset signal is active, no source is selected.
Similar PALs are used to decode the data source field for the TD bus 122. The PAL which selects the TD data bus source also contains logic to gate the FIFO read with their corresponding FIFO empty status signals, to prevent the reading of an empty FIFO (which could cause errors within the FIFO).
CD Bus Destination PAL
This PAL decodes the CP microcode bits that select the destination for the data on the CD bus 112, and drives the read enable line(s) of the appropriate device.
Similar PALs are used to decode the data destination bits for the TD bus 122.
Whenever the source or destination device has chip enable lines which must be driven, (e.g. the memory in VME interface 160, or in command memory 190), the respective chip enable lines are driven.
Sign/Zero Extend PAL 216
This PAL performs a sign or zero extend function, depending on an enable signal and on the high bit of the source data. Since the PALs preferably used are only 8 bits wide, a pair of them is used for every sign/zero extend operation.
This PAL is used in two places: one pair hangs on the CD bus
112 (shown as block 216 in Figure 2A), and one pair (shown as block 316 in Figure 3A) hangs on the TD bus 122.
The bus source logic provides an enable bit to the sign/zero extend logic 216, when a 16-bit source is being accessed.
Figures 14A and 14B show the structure and operation of this PAL. More precisely, Figure 14A shows a slightly different embodiment, where three eight-bit multiplexers are used for each sign/zero extend operation. This permits single-byte sources to be used, which is not possible with the presently preferred embodiment. Figure 14B shows the command structure used with the hardware of Figure 14A.
- Multiway, -Branch Addressing PAL 217 - ' This PAL is used to implement ~the multiway branching capability of the sequencer 310. This PAL takes a three-bit condition code and inserts it into the least significant three bits of the microcode constant field. The modified constant field is fed back onto the sequencer bus 315. A shift field input controls whether the result is shifted 0, 1 or 2 places left (i.e. multiplied by 1, 2 or 4), or whether the input constant field is routed through unchanged. Another input enables the tristate output drivers of this PAL.
As shown in Figure 3A, this PAL is preferably connected in parallel with a tri-state buffer 318. Only the least significant 8 bits of the constant field are routed through the
PAL 317. The most significant 8 bits are routed through the buffer 318.
(Preferably the modified constant field is #used with a relative sequencer instruction, but it may alternatively be used, with care, with absolute or indirect instructions.)The multiway branching operation is discussed in greater detail below, in connection with Figure 30.
Data Input Condition Code Select PAL
This PAL (located in the DTP module 120, and shown
as multiplexer 312 in Figure 3) selects a set of FIFO status codes which can be tested by the DTP microcode sequencer
310. The selected set is encoded, and provided to the se quencer 310, to permit multiway branching on these conditions. The source for these status signals can be selected to be within one of four bus input interfaces: the GIP interface 170, the two input ports of the data pipe interface 150, and the VME interface 160.
DTP and I/F PALs
Following are brief descriptions of some of the most important PALs used in the data transfer processor module 120 and in the interface units 160, 170, 180.
VME address decode PALs
One PAL decodes the least significant bits of the VME address, and the 5 address modifier bits. The output goes active when the VME address and address modifiers match the previously selected ones. (Up to 15 address and address modifier combinations can be programmed, and one of these can be selected by a 4 bit switch signal.) There is also an input from a VME interrupt PAL, which indicates when an interrupt acknowledge cycle is in progress. This is ORed with the address decode to drive the output.
A similar PAL decodes the most significant address bits (18-31) of the VME address# bus. On this PAL, an additional input selects whether the top 8 bits of the address are used or ignored.
DMA FIFO Status and Clock Control PAL
This PAL controls the routing of the clock and status
signals from the DMA FIFO 670. This PAL also controls
whether the clocks of these FIFOs are under the control of
the DMA controller 640 or decoded from the VME interface.
VME read and write decode PALs 611
The read decode PAL decodes the 8 possible read
sources from the VME bus. The internal VME addresses are
decoded and qualified by the data strobe, write enable, and
board select signals.
The write decode PAL decodes the 9 possible write sources from the VME bus. The internal VME addresses are decoded and qualified by the data strobe, write enable, board select, and a VME write enable signal. The VME write enable signal can be used to control the setup and hold requirements of the various write enables or clocks, independent of the VME bus timings.
VME slave access timing PAL
This PAL generates the tim#ing for data transfer acknowledgements in che bus controller 650. The timing can be tailored to- the register.or memory that is being read or written, - because essentially the same addresses and qualifiers which the decoder 611 receives are also inputs to this
PAL. Another input delays the timing if the dual ported VME memory 660 is busy. (If this occurs, an extra cycle is also inserted after the busy signal ends.)
Another input delays the timing if the serial loop is busy shifting data. When data is written to the serial loop register 680, a delay of three cycles is inserted after the
VME write enable signal goes high, so that the serial loop state machine (in a different PAL) has time to latch in the data.
This PAL also generates an enable signal whenever the
VME interface memory 660 is being accessed.
Serial Loop Control PAL
The PAL implements multiplexer 2710 and state machine 2740. The state machine function is connected to control the 818 serial/parallel registers at the interface to each
of the writable control stores in the serial loop. (These include the CP WCS 220 and the DTP WCS 320, and also a FP
WCS 470 and CP WCS extension 490 on each of the processor
modules 130.)
The state machine controls a shift register and a serial
data clock. When a data transfer to or from the shift register
is occurring, the shift register and serial data clock are con trolled as a function of the access type (i.e. read or write), and in accordance with a mode signal. The serial loop mode signal specifies one of three access modes:
DATA HOLD (00): read/write like a normal register.
DATA SHIFT (10): read/write like a normal register but then shift the data by 16 bits around the serial loop while toggling the serial data clock.
DATA PULSE (11): read/write like a normal register and pulse the serial data clock once.
In ##th#e DATA~SHIFT mode, the state machine controls the shift register, so that on one cycle it shifts and on the next it holds. This two cycle pattern repeats 16 times, so the contents of the shift register are inserted into the serial loop.
On the hold cycles the serial data clock is asserted. While the data is being shifted, a busy signal is active to hold. off any further VME accesses to the shift register until the shifting is finished.
In the DATA~PULSE mode, 300-400 ns after a write operation, the serial data clock is pulsed high, once. This pulse loads up the internal flip-flop inside the "818" shadow register. (Each of these shadow registers contains an internal flip-flop, which controls its operation mode when backloading data into the respective corresponding WCS.) No data is shifted around the serial loop when this D clock is pulsed.
(The delay allows data to stabilize, ~ to percolate around the loop.) During this operation a busy signal is activated to inhibit any VME accesses to the serial loop.
This PAL also contains multiplexer 2710, which collects the four serial loop return paths 225B, 225C, 225D, and 225E, and resynchronizing flip-flop 2720.
DCM and DCM I/F PALs
Following are brief descriptions of some of the most important PALs used in the data cache memory 140, and in the CP Extension Logic, located on the FP module 130 but controlled by the CP module 110, which handles the data interface to the cache memory 140.
DCM Address Decode PAL
This PAL, together with a multiplexer, is shown as block 560 in Figure 5. This PAL decodes the data cache memory address. Two address inputs are provided: input 516 corresponds to bits 19-25 of the CA bus 111, and input 517 corresponds to bits 19-25 of the TA bus 121. A control lirie 521, generated by arbitration logic 535, selects which address to decode.
DCM Holding Register Control PAL This PAL (controlled by the CP and DTP microcode streams) generates various control signals used to control the three banks of data holding registers 560A, 560B, and 420. Microcode bits are decoded to drive the clock and output enable signals. The signals to control bank 560A are controlled byes the CP access signal 536. The signals to control bank 560B are controlled by both CP access signal 536 and
DTP access signal 537, because the DTP port has a lower priority.
The signals to control register bank 420 (the FP holding registers on the floating point modules 130) are ANDed with the# appropriate module select signals. All the clock signals are qualified by the write enable gate clock signal, to control the timing of the positive clock edge.
Another set of signals can disable the memory output on access cycles. This allows the holding registers to be read back without writing into the data cache memory. (These signals are similarly used in another PAL to get access to the write mask information.)
DCM Write Flag Register PALs
Several PALs are used to implement the write mask logic 530 (which provides an 8 bit write mask signal 512 to the memory bank 510.)The PAL corresponding to the DTP interface registers 560B will be described first. A similar
PAL is used to track the status of the other register set 560A, which is accessed by the CP module 110.
The purpose of this PAL is to remember which of the 8
F~words in the holding register 560B have been written to by the DTP. When a data cache memory write is required, the outputs of this PAL mask the parallel write from the DTP holding registers. Only those F~words that have been updated are actually written into the data cache memory bank 510. Whenever a write to a holding register occurs, the corresponding flag bit is set within the PAL. The flag bit to set is decoded from the DTP address under these conditions. The flag bits are cleared on a data cache write. However, due to the pipelined operation, the DTP can write to the holding register 560B on the same cycle. In this case the flag bit would remain set. )
In additi#on, all 8 flag bits can be set simultaneously (in response to a microcode command). This allows block writes.
A reset signal clears the flags. The logic is completely synchronous and is clocked by the microcode clock generated by clock generator 250.
Another input signal enables the read back mode. In this mode the state of the flag register . can be serially output, via the two least significant bits. The microcode can read the flag bits in the two least significant bits, and, by swapping with the other flag bits, the microcode can read all the flag bits. The DTP address selects which of the 3 flag bits
are to be swapped with even flags bits, and which with odd flag bits.
FP write mask PAL
This PAL generates the write mask for transfers between the FP holding register and the data cache memory.The parameters that control the mask generation are the
number of F~words to write, and the F~word to start from.
FP PALs
Following are brief descriptions of the programmed array logic units (PALs) used in the FP module 130, in the presently preferred embodiment.
WCS load enable PAL
This PAL qualifies some of the signals used to load microcode into the FP module's own WCS 470, and/or into the
CP module's extended WCS 490 (i.e. the WCS portion located on the FP module), with a module select signal.
Host-source module select PAL
This - P L compares the module address inputs from the host with local switch settings, to see if this module has been selected. One set of- inputs enables WCS loads to occur.
A one-bit-per-module #a#ddress is provided. This permits WCS writes to be independently controlled for all of the modules 130. (By contrast, as discussed above, data accesses use module addresses having fewer bits than the maximum number of modules, so that not all combinations of modules can be selected.)
As shown in Figure 28, the preferred topology of the serial command loop is such that two loop portions 2840 enter each numeric processing module 130: one portion 225A to provide input to that module's own WCS 470, and one portion 225C to provide input to the WCS extension 490 on that module. Thus, two separate output commands are provided (and further qualified by the module address), so that the WCS 470 and the WCS extension 490 can feed their outputs onto the common return busses 225E and 225D (respectively), which any of the modules can drive when selected.
CP module select PAL
This PAL compares the module address selected by the
CP against the locally stored values. If a match is found, then four outputs are asserted. Two of these outputs enable the control signals to clock or output enable the holding registers 420. Another output signal drives an LED, to give a visual indication of which FP module(s) have been selected. The final output enables a condition code bit ("selected") which is returned to the main board. The final output is the qualification signal to most of the logic controlled by the CP extension microcode, to enable the action defined by microcode fields (or registered values) to take place.
FP-WCS control PALs
Two PALs are used to control the WCS 470. These two
PALs are located in separate areas, but they are interlocked together because both affect the WCS. -- In general, the first
PAL is used to control the Instruction Register (which is used for microcode compaction as described above). The
other controls parallel microcode loading.
The first PAL controls the output enables of the two
RAM chips in the WCS 470. In the presently preferred em
bodiment, the WCS 470 is configured using two RAM chips,
to provide a better match to the interface register set 420
for parallel loading.Since (in the presently preferred em
bodiment) the cache bus 144 is multiplexed down to a 64
bit data path into the FP module 130, the division of the
WCS 470 into two portions provides a better match for par
allel loading of the microinstructions (which in the presently
preferred embodiment are 104 bits long).
When the host is loading microcode, the instruction
register is disabled. In this case the output of the instruction
register is always disabled, and the RAM outputs are con
trolled by a signal which is generated by the host.
The second PAL performs two separate functions.
These are combined only to achieve hardware compaction.
The first function is to control which bank of
pipeline registers 476 to enable during the reading of the
WCS by the host.
The second function is to adjust the transfer le#ngth, i e the number of words to transfer between the holding registers and the register file.
There are two pipeline register output enable signals, and they are never active at the same time. (These signals are used to enable the two banks of register 476. As discussed elsewhere, this structure corresponds to the two banks of WCS 470.) For either of the pipeline registers to be output enabled, the busy signals must be inactive, and the module select and FD pipeline register output control (from the host) must be active.
The transfer length field is coded so that 1 represents one word to transfer, 2 for two words etc. To specify eight words to transfer, 0 is used. The transfer clock generator (part of the cache bus interface logic 460) needs to know the number of transfer cycles, and this is the number of minor cycles + 1 (for pipeline startup). The number of minor cycles is a function of the transfer length and its start position.
Handshake logic PAL
Two PALs are used to control the handshaking logic.
The first PAL performs two in#dependent functions: First, it controls the handshaking between# the CP and FP module
130. (In this function, it implements a state machine having a state diagram as shown in Figure 22.) Secondly (and independently), it also~ controls bank selection when the register file 420 is used in a double -buffered mode. (The principles of operation of this mode are generally shown in Figure 20, and are discussed above.)
The handshaking state machine indicates the CP is to wait for the FP by driving the CPWAIT output HI. If the FP is to wait, the handshaking state machine indicates this by driving FPWAIT HI.
If both CPWAIT and FPWAIT are HI, and the CP is the first processor to aassert its done signal, then the sequence is as follows:
1. When CPDONE is found to be HI, then FPWAIT is driven LO.
2. CPWAIT stays HI and control remains in this state until FPDONE goes HI.
3. When FPDONE has gone HI, CPWAIT is driven
LO.
4. Both CPWAIT and FPWAIT signals remain LO until the corresponding DONE signals are disasserted.
The above sequence is duplicated, with the roles reversed,if the '-FP asserts FPDONE first.
If CPDONE and FPDONE both arrive at the same time (i.e.are both first sampled HI on the same clock edge), then both CPWAIT and FPWAIT go LO together.
The bank swap side of this PAL is separate from the
CP/FP handshaking just described. The two input signals that control this state machine are SCPBANKSEL and
FPSWAP. SCPBANKSEL specifies how the CP wants the banks to be allocated when a swap point is reached by the FP.
When the FP reaches a swap point it drives FPSWAP active until the swap point has been passes.Note that the swap points are synchronized by the CP/FP handshake logic. At
the FPSWAP point the state of SCPBANKSEL is the new state
of the BANKSEL output, and outside the swappoint the
BANKSEL state remains unchanged.
The first PAL runs synchronously to the FP, so another
PAL is used to capture the CP-synchronized signals which
indicate that the CP module 110 has finished, or that it
wants to swap banks.
This second PAL is governed by three handshake
mode bits (subject to the module select signal). The three
handshake mode bits are allocated as follows:
bits 0 and 1 are encoded to implement the
following actions:
00 No operation
01 Set CPDONE
10 Clear CPDONE
11 Test mode.
Independently of this, bit 2 requests that the register banks be swapped.
The CPDONE state remains unchanged across microcode cycles, unless the instruction is a set or clear operation.
This PAL can detect a positive e#dge on bit 2 of the mode field, by comparing the new input with the previously regis,tered version. When the edge is detected this toggles the state of the bank select output.
- Interrupt capture PAL Another PAL i's used to capture clock edges on CP
WAIT, FPWAIT, and several interrupt signals. The error interrupt shares the same interrupt output as the breakpoint interrupt, but has its own mask bit. The outputs are reset when the corresponding mask bit is driven LO, but this mask bit must' be returned to the HI state for further interrupt edges to detected.
Microaddress and clock control PAL
This PAL performs two independent functions: control of the FP microaddress source, and control of the FP clock.
The microaddress source is selected by two bits of input, and can be as follows: 00 FP Next Address Logic 477; Ol CP microaddress 211A; 10 Start address register 479 (continuous); 11 the output of stack 478.
Alternatively, another input permits the two-bit select command to be overridden. In this case the CP microaddress will be enabled whenever the module is enabled. This input permits the host to get access to the WCS 470 for startup or debug.
The outputs to control the FP clock generator 480 (which is ECL in the presently preferred embodiment) can be selected as follows: 00 FP microcode clock is free running; 01 FP microcode clock stopped.
Another logical condition permits the FP clock to be controlled by a different input, so that the clock free runs whenever this is asserted.
Serial / parallel load select
This PAL controls the loading of microcode from the host or the CP into the FP module's WCS 470. Microcode loaded by the host must use the serial loop, but the CP can load microcode in parallel. To achieve this, this PAL essentially implements a 2:1 multiplexer. There are several points to note:
1. The pipeline registers used in WCS 470 do not have separate output enables, so they are separately enabled to prevent contention on the data buses.
2. The dependence of the two serial data clock signals 'is switched, depending on whether the host or the CP is selected.
3. When the host is controlling the serial loop, then a mode signal selects whether both serial data clocks are driven together (for normal data shift), or only one of them is driven (as selected by another signal). The serial data clocks are controlled like this during the read back of data from the WCS 470.
CP write decode PAL
This PAL decodes microcode fields in the WCS extension 490, to select which of the registers 420 is to be accessed. The selected register is only written to when
RCREGDIR is LO. As well as selecting one out of the XFREG,
FPREG, UAREG or MREG to be written to, two other functions are performed:
1. The direction and output enable controls to the
CD bus transceivers 444 are generated.
2. The microcode bit to clear a breakpoint is write-enable-gated with the write-gate clock. The use of a short pulse here prevents missing breakpoints which occur immediately after a restart. (It could pose problems if the CP were still holding a signal low to clear the previous breakpoint when anew breakpoint appeared.) We are therefore ORing this signal (active-low AND) with the clock to keep it short.
All the clocks/strobes are qualified by CPMCCK and
CPMCCKWG to set their timings within a microcode cycle, but are disabled if the module hasn't been selected.
CP read decode PAL
This PAL decodes the CP microcode fields to select which of the registers 420 is to be accessed. The selected register is only read when RCREGDIR is HI.
Holding Register Control PALs 461
Two PALs are used to control outputs from the holding registers 420.
The first one generates the transfer sequence waveforms used to enable clocks to each pair of the registers 420.
Each transfer cycle lasts from 1 to 4 minor cycles, as specified by the transfer length. (The "minor cycle" period is generated by the transfer clock 412, as discussed above.) On each minor cycle a pair of F~words is transferred, although one of them may be inhibited by another PAL. The transfer sequence waveforms appear on four lines as a "walking LO."
The first line in the cyclic sequence to be asserted is controlled by XFHRST < 1:2 > and only occurs when XFINIT is
HI. XFINIT is only active during the first cycle and on subsequent cycles the current sequence waveform is used to generate the next. UCXFDIR disables HRCKENP* < 0:3 > when the transfer direction is from holding registers 420 to register file 430, unless the LOOPBACK mode is in operation.The
HRCKALL overrides the normal start and length controls, and forces all clock enables to be active at the same time thus quadruplicating the data into all register pairs in the one cycle.
The XFTYPE input selects whether the waveform sequence is for normal transfer cycles or a parallel microcode load cycle. In the latter case there are always 2 minor transfer cycles and the timing can be slightly different. This input can inhibit all the clocks to the holding registers.
The second PAL generates the transfer sequence waveforms used to output enable each register pair. These two PALs are used for opposite transfer directions.
A "clock mask" PAL generates the 8 clock enables used to control the writing into the eight 32 bit registers (F#registers) which make up the holding register 420. In a single major transfer cycle up to 8 F~words can be transferred into the 8 separate registers of the register bank 420.
The inputs show the first register which must be updated (0...7), and the number of F registers (1...8) to update. The
PAL accordingly generates a mask with a bit set for every register to be updated (within the major transfer cycle). If
the transfer direction is from the holding registers 420 to
the register file 430, then all the mask bits are set HI, thus
preventing any writing to the holding register. Similarly, if a
microcode load cycle is occurring, then the clocks are dis
abled.If all holding registers are to be cleared (as indicated
by yet another signal), then the enables are set low so all the
holding registers are updated.
Holding Register start address PAL
This PAL implements a 4:1 multiplexer followed by a
register. The 4 possible inputs to the multiplexer are:
HR start address from a register;
HR start address from the microcode instruction;
HR start address from the CP address bus;
The previous HR start address.
If the module is not selected, then the previous HR start ad
dress is maintained.
Register File WE control
This PAL controls the write enables to the register files
430. In a minor cycle 1 or 2 F~words can be written into the
register file. Six bits of start position and length are used to
generate the write enable mask, in the same way the clock
enable mask is generated.The relevant 2 bits from the mask
are sequenced out of a lower-half-write signal or an upper
half-write signal, depending on which minor cycle is in progress. When the loopback mode is active, the write enable mask is disabled. Another signal can be used to force both words to be written on every minor cycle.
The -lower-half-write signal and upper-half-write signal are disabled if - the transfer direction is wrong, or if the transfer type is a microcode# load function. The input signals are also decoded to select the read/write mode of the register file. A busy signal line is also provided, to indicate the holding register data bus 422 is in use.
Register File address modification PAL
This PAL registers the register file address when the module is selected; otherwise the previous address is held.
The most significant bit of the address is modified to implement the soft double buffering. A two-bit signal selects what type of modification will be made to the most significant address bit. The options are:
1. Use the input bit. This is the physical addressing mode.
2. Use BANKSEL. This is the double buffered mode.
3. Use the inverse value of BANKSEL. This is the preview mode, whereby the CP or FP can access data on the other side of the double buffer without having to swap banks.
Register File address incrementer
This PAL (when enabled) increments the Register File pointer. Thus, the address can be incremented at each minor cycle (of the transfer clock), to fetch out the next pair of numbers from the register file 430, or write the next pair in.
A control input permits keeping the address constant during the first minor cycle of a transfer from holding registers 420 to register file 430. This is necessary because of the pipelining in the data path.
Data valid control PAL
This PAL controls the data valid signals to the even and odd sides of the register files 430. In a minor cycle, either 1 or 2 F~words can be written into the register file. Depending of the start address and length, one or two words of data will be valid in this minor cycle. Two outputs (EVENV 1:ID* and ODDVALID*) indicate which words are valid. This function is disabled for transfers from the register file.
Microinstruction address select PAL
This PAL selects the next microinstruction address to be from the true address field (i.e. the output of register 474) or the false address field (the output of register 475).
An internal "always true" status can be selected for unconditional jumps. Both can be disabled to allow the start address register 479 to drive the microaddress bus 473, or when STACKPOP or READSTACK* signals indicate that a stack operation is underway. (STACKPOP is derived from FP microcode, while READ STACK is controlled by the CP.)
As noted above, the FP module 130 does not have a
separate sequencer, in the same sense that the CP module
110 and DTP module 120 do. In fact, the module does not
even have a separate program counter as such ;instead, the
true and false outputs of registers 474 and 475 fill this
function.
ALU sticky status
This PAL remembers when one of the floating point
status bits has indicated a "sticky status" condition. (A
"sticky" status is used, in the presently preferred embodi
ment, to monitor some fault conditions separately from the primary error-handling mechanism. For example, a test for
overflow can be performed at the end of a vector operation rather than on every element calculation. The multiplier 440
and the ALU 450 each have several #outputs for sticky status bits (to show overflow, underflow, invalid operation, and similar errors). Two microcode bits control the updating and the clearing of the sticky status register on a per cycle basis.
A similar PAL performs this function for the FMPY status. The logic in these PALs also provide encoded outputs to indicate various sticky status conditions. The clock timing used permits the presence of a stuck status bit can be check in one cycle.
Stack control PAL 3910
This PAL performs two separate functions: control of the subroutine stack addressing and control of the table address counters.
Figure 39 shows the preferred embodiment of the stack register 478 in the floating-point processor module 130. The PAL 3910 controls a multilevel pipeline register 3920. (In the presently preferred embodiment, this is an
AMD 29520.) The multilevel register 3920 includes four pipelined registers 3921. However, the output multiplexer 3922 can- also select any one of these registers for direct output. The output of this multiplexer is connected to the microinstruction address bus 473 of the FP module 130.
The PAL 3910 provides control inputs to multilevel register 3920 which make it function as a LIFO (last-in -firs t- out) memory. This permits the memory to operate as a stack. The PAL 3910 provides transfer signals 3912 (which are ANDed with the microcode clock) to the pipelined registers 3921. It also provides a select signal 3913 to the multiplexer 3922.
The PAL implements the usual push and pop functions.
In addition, it can also be commanded to enter a read-stack
mode, where any stack level can be read without disturbing
the stack status.
Register file address modifier PAL
This PAL modifies the most significant bit of the FP
register file address fields as a function of address modifier
code and the currently selected bank of the double buffer.
There are three address fields (X, Y and T) to be modified
(corresponding to the first operand bus 431, second operand
bus 432, and results local bus 433), and the logic is identical
for each of them. The logic for one of these address will now
be described. - A modified most-significant address bit is derived
from the most significant bit of the input address, a two-bit
modifier code, and the bank select signal. The modific#ations
to the address bit are:
1. No modification - this is the physical address
ing mode.
2. Inverse of the bank -select signal - This is the
"logical" mode, used for normal accesses in the double
buffered configuration. Note that the bank selection is oppo
site to that used when data is transferred between the register file and the holding registers
3. Equal to the bank select signal - This is the
preview mode. As discussed above, in this mode the FP can
access data on the other side of the double buffer, without
having to swap banks. This capability helps to keep the
floating point pipeline full.
The 3 modified address bits are registered externally
and fed back in as "old A6" bits (one for each address).
These are used to replace the "calculated" values for these
bits when a "use old A6"command is asserted. This feature
reduces the address setup time when the address mode re
mains unchanged over several cycles.
Results bus control PAL
This PAL decodes the results-bus source microcode field, and output enables the required device (e g, FMPY 440, FALU 450, or scratchpad memory 1610, in the configuration of Figure 16). This PAL also provides a chip enable signal to the scratchpad memory 1610 when needed.
VME interrupts PAL
This PAL implements the VME interrupt protocols in a state machine. When GENVMEINT goes active (high) IRQEN is driven high on the next positive VCK edge. IRQEN remains active until the interrupt is acknowledged, so the cause of the interrupt (GENVMEINT) is removed by driving
CLRIRQFF* low.The VIACK*aAd VIACKIN* signals are monitored and when an interrupt acknowledge cycle is detected for the interrupt being generated an internal interrupt acknowledge cycle is started. The correct VME interrupt acknowledge cycle is identified by these signals going active (VIACKIN* is part of a daisy chain) and VMEIA < 01:03 > being set to the same level the interrupt was generated on.The internal interrupt acknowledge 'cycle waits for VMEIDS to be asserted and then over a number. of cycles enables the interrupt vector onto the . data, bus (IVOE*), sets IVDTACK and removes IRQEN. Sometime later
VMEIDS goes inactive and the interrupt vector and
IVDTACK are removed. When an interrupt acknowledge cycle occurs VINTACK is asserted which then starts the BUS
CON (via the address decode pals) on a slave cycle which will
allow the . interrupt vector onto the bus. The interrupt
acknowledge daisy chain passes through this PAL
unhindered when no interrupt requests are outstanding.
DMAIVME state machine
This PAL is only concerned with data transfers be
tween the VME\ bus and the data FIFO. The direction of the
transfer is hidden from the state machine so the clocks and
status are switched externally. When a DMARSTART goes ac tive the state machine starts the DMA transfer. It first waits for synchronized FIFO status (SDMAFSTAT*) to indicate there is data or room in the FIFO for one transfer and
SDMADONE to indicate the DMA counters are ready. DMACK is driven low to output enable the FIFO in case it is providing data. The state machine issues a request for the bus (LBUSREQ*) and waits for it to be granted (SLBGRANT*).
When the bus is granted, DMAAS* and DMADS* are asserted in compliance with the VME bus setup times. These two signals are held until the VME slave device returns the data transfer acknowledge(SLDTACK*) and then DMACK is driven high. One cycle later DMAAS* and DMADS* are removed and a positive edge driven on DMACOUNT. If the transfer mode (DMARBLOCK) is single transfers then LBUSREL is asserted to release the bus and the above sequence repeats. If the transfer mode is block(sequential) transfers then the bus is not released unless the end of the block has been reached (as indicated by BLOCKEND), FIFO is full/empty (SDMAFSTAT*), DMA count is exhausted (SDMADONE) or
DMA has been aborted by the negation of DMARSTART. Note that during a block transfer the DMAAS*is held active until released by BLOCKEND.
- The SLBUSERR* input goes active when there has been a bus error as a result of a DMA access. If this occurs the current transfer is aborted and DMABERR is driven. The state machine remains in this state until DMATSTART is negatedwhich will clear DMABERR. The final input, DMAT
EST, allows the DMA to occur without any VME bus cycles occurring. This is useful in testing the basic operation of the state machine and also provides a means whereby the FIFOs can be flushed in the event of a bus error.
A reset condition can be forced by using an unusedcombination of DMARSTART, DMARBLOCK and DMARTEST.
DMA address control
The address bits (VMEIA < 01:07 > ) are monitored to detect when a 256 byte boundary is about to be reached so that a block DMA transfer can be interrupted briefly to allow VMEarbitration. (This allows compliance with the maximum block transfer length constraint in the VME specification.) This is indicated on BLOCKEND. The remainder ofthe PAL is concerned with handling the DMA address incrementing. Depending of the transfer size (16 or 32 bits)the DMA address is incremented by 1 or 2 respectivelywhenever DMAINC goes high. The incrementing of the DMA address is controlled by DMARLONGINC which selects whetherDMACNTEN*is active for one or two cycles of the microcodeclock. CLRFF* resets the flip flop that caught the edge ofDMACOUNT. VMEIRST* is available to reset thePAL, if necessary.
Interrupt edge catcher
This PAL catches the positive edges on GIP lEMPTY *,VMEIFEMPTY *, DP1IEMPTY*, DP2IEMPTY*, VT PINTD and VTPINT, andnegative edges on GIPOEMPTY* and
VMEOFEMPTY*. This allowsthe interrupt signals #to be edge triggered and latersynchronized to the microcode clock.
When an -edge isdetected the corresponding output is driven
low. The edgecatching flip flops are reset in pairs: TPINTGIP*
resets thetwo GIP edges, TTIVMEF* resets the two VME edges,- TPINTVME*resets the two VTP edges and TPINTD
PIPE* resets the two Dredges.
GIP microcode decode
This pal decodes the three microcode signals
UGIPRD*,UGIPWR* and UGIPFR to generate the output en
ables, FIFO readand write clocks and the register clock. The
FIFO read clock isgated by the FIFO empty status (GIPOE*) to
prevent thereading of an empty FIFO causing errors within
the FIFO. Theclock type signals are qualified with GIPC1 or
GIPFRDCK.
GIP interrupt mask
This PAL performs two functions. First of all it selects 4out of the 7 possible interrupt sources and selectivelyinverts where necessary so the interrupting action resultsin a positive edge. Two sets of 4 interrupt sources areallowed for and GIPSELI selects between them. The secondfunction is to mask the selected set by the 4 mask bits(GIPIM < 0:3 > ) before driving the results out as GIPINT < 0:3 > . The GIPIACK* signal -is simply inverted to giveGIPIACK.
GIP interrupt state machine
This PAL looks for positive edges on the interrupt inputs(GIPINT < 0:3 > ) and when one or more occurs GIPINT is driven.A specific interrupt is cleared by selecting it with themicrocode field UGIPCCS < 0:1 > and asserting UGIPCLAI.
Allflip flops are cleared on reset by GIPRST*. The edges aredetected by delaying the interrupts by one cycle andcomparing the delayed and non-delayed versions. The non-delayed versions have already been synchronized to the
GIPClclock that this state machine runs off.
Host Computer
A system like that shown in Figure 1 can be used in a wide variety of computer architectures. The presently preferred embodiment uses the system of Figure 1 as a numeric
accelerator subsystem. The host computer isa VAX 8800, running a VME operating system, and communicating with
the system of Figure 1 over a VME interface and VME bus
4110. However, an immense variety of other configurations
could be used instead. For example, there are a wide variety
of UNIX machines which could be used, including e.g. units
from Sun Microsystems.
Moreover, other system bus structures could be used
instead. For example, the subsystem of Figure 1 could be
used with a VAX running VMS, and linked through an in
terface box. This subsystem can even be used with a per
sonal computer running MS-DOS, which communicates via
Ethernet (for example), with a simple# VME-bus interface box.
It should also be noted that, although the internal architecture of the subsystem of Figure 1 is primarily a 32-bit architecture, this subsystem can be used very advantageously with 64-bit words or 48-bit words. One factor in achieving this capability is the use of an internal data path in the floating-point processor module 130 which permits 64-bit operations to be performed in only two cycles. Another factor in achieving this, again, is the verywide cache bus 144, which permits multiple 64-bit words to be transmitted in parallel to the numeric processor module 130.
Thus, performing 64-bit calculations can usually be performed - at nearly half of the word rate (i.e. almost the same bit- rate) as 32-bit operation.
Moreover, of course, the numerous inventive teachings set forth herein can be adapted to a tremendous variety of systems. These teachings can be adapted to systems whose bus standards# do not at all correspond to those of the presently preferred embodiment. In fact, the VME bus interface is not even especially advantageous (aside from having reasonable total bandwidth), and is disclosed simply to .provide full compliance with patentee's duty of disclosure.
Bus Interface to Host
As noted above, the presently preferred embodiment uses a VME bus as the primary interface to the host. This bus is well known, as discussed above.
A wide variety of other bus configurations could be used instead. For example, VersaBus, FutureBus, or NuBus could be readily designed int#o the system if desired. For very high-speed computing systems, it might -be advantageous to use optical busses, using modulated solid-state lasers on optical fibers.
Picture Processor Subsvstem One advantageous system embodiment uses not only a host communicating with one or more subsystems like that shown in Figure 1 (or 9A or 10), but also uses an additional subsystem which is a specialized graphics processor. The most preferred picture processor here is known as a "GIP" processor, and is available from benchMark Technologies
Ltd., #Kingston-upon-Thames, England.
Figure 41 provides one sample configuration, but of course a wide variety of other topologies and system architectures could be used instead. A host computer 4100 communicates with a picture processor subsystem 4140, and with at least two numeric accelerator subsystems 4150 (which may be, for example, like those of Figures 1, 9, 10), over a VME bus 4110. The VME bus 4110 also permits access to main memory 4160, mass storage 4170 (e.g. a hard disk), and optionally also one or more device interfaces 4180 (which may be output devices, gateways, other storage devices, etc.).
Two additional busses are used in this embodiment.
The picture data bus 4130 provides an application-customized interface to a graphcs processor. (This is a wide bus,
which is particularly useful for image or graphics transmis
sion.) In -this sample embodiment, this is the "GIP bus"
(marketed by benchMark Technologies Ltd.). This applica
tion-optimized bus is well-matched to the high-bandwidth
I/O demands of the picture processing subsystem 4140. It is
a very wide bus, with 160 data lines.
The other backplane bus is the data pipe bus 4120.
This bus permits multiple numeric accelerator subsystems to
be combined in topologies such as those shown in Figures 34,
35, 36, or 37. In this sample embodiment, this bus has 32
data lines.
Operation of the Svstem Some important ways to use the various points of invention, and some ways to use the disclosed system architecture, will now be described. A number of the methods described are believed to be separately innovative.
Realization of a sample operation
A small example of the use of the architecture will now be described. In this example, the host processor 4100 issues a command to the numeric accelerator subsystem 4150 (like thåt of Figure 1, 9, or 10) to multiply two arrays together (on an element by element basis), and deposit the results in a third array. All three arrays reside in the VME memory space (e.g. in main memory 4160). Before the com mand is issued, the subsystem 4150 is in the idle state, and after the command has been executed it returns to the idle state. This is also shown diagrammatically in Figure 42.
Two versions of the command scenario are given. The first one details a system where the only memory space used is physical memory. (Such an architecturemight be used where it is desired that the host offload as much of the work as possible onto the accelerator subsystem.) The- second scenario is for a system that has virtual memory; such as is found on a VAX running VMS, or on a UNIX computer.In the second scenario it will be seen how the dynamic memory allocation and the paging of data to/from the disks are accommodated in the processing operation.
Figure 15 shows how the command memory 190 is organized. It also shows some of the types of commands and interrupts exchanged, and how some of those comands and interrupts are handled. A key point to note is that the command memory 190 is preferably partitioned in software, so that it includes two command FIFOs. A cp~command FIFO 1520 buffers commands addressed to the CP module 110, and a dtp~command FIFO 1510 buffers command addressed to the DTP module 120.
The command interface, interaction, and scheduling of the work are controlled by software, and can be tailored as required.Thus, the following example does not define ways in which the system must be used. It is provided simply to illustrate ways in which the system may be used.
Physical memorv model (CP/DTPlnteraction) In this example, the host processor issues a command to the accelerator subsystem to multiply two arrays together (on an element by element basis) and deposit the results in a third array. All three arrays reside in the VME memory space. Before the command is issued the accelerator subsystem is in the idle state, and after the command has been executed it returns to the idle state. This is also shown diagrammatically in Figure 42.
The following steps occur during the execution of a command:
(1) The host writes a vector multiply command into the accelerator subsystem's command queue (maintained in the VME interface memory), specifying the number of elements in the array, the address of the two source arrays, and the address of the results array. After the command and its parameters are added to the queue, the host generates an interrupt in the data transfer processor module 120. The host is now free to do other work.
(2) On receiving the interrupt from the host, the data transfer processor module 120 copies the command and its parameters into a software maintained cp~command FIFO in the command memory. An interrupt is generated in the control processor module 110 to notify it of the existence of this command. The data transfer processor module 120 returns to its idle state.
(3) In response to the interrupt, the control processor module 110 leaves its idle state, and reads the command and its parameters from the cp~command FIFO 1520 in the command memory 190. The addresses given in the command are checked and found to lie off-board (i.e. not in the data cache memory 140). Thus, in this example, two data fetch commands and an "interrupt CP when done" command are written to the dtp~command FIFO 1510 in the command memory 190. Each data fetch command contains the source address of the array, its length, and its destination address in the data cache memory. The data transfer processor module 120 is then interrupted, and the control processor module 110 returns to its idle state.
(4) In response to the interrupt, the data transfer processor module 120 leaves its idle state, and reads the first command (and its parameters) from the dtp#command FIFO 1510. The data transfer processor module 120 checks the address where data is to be fetched from, and identifies that it lies within the VME address space. The data transfer processor module 120 then sets up the DMA controller 640 in the VME interface 160 to fetch the array and write it in to the data FIFO 670 in the VME interface 160.(Note that this is actually a hardware FIFO, unlike the command queue FIFOs 1510 and 1520, which implement the first-in-first-out functionality in software.) As this data arrives, the data transfer processor module 120 reads the data from-the data FIFO 670, and writes it into the data cache memory 140. When the transfer is completed the dtp~command FIFO is checked to see what the next command is (if any). In this case another fetch-data command is found, and is executed in an identical fashion to the first fetch command. When this is finished the next command is read and executed. This command generates an interrupt in the control processor module 110. The dtp~command FIFO 1510 is now empty, and the data transfer processor module 120 returns to its idle state.
(5) The interrupt informs the control processor module 110 that the two arrays it requested are now stored
in the data cache memory. Since the destination address of
the result array is off-board, the control processor module
110 allocates a temporary array in the data cache memory
140 to hold the results.
The CP module 110 now begins the calculation process.
During the calculation process, intermediate data sets will be
fetched from cache memory 140 into the register files of the
FP module 130 (under control of the CP module 110); the FP module 130 will perform numeric operations, running its
own microcode and interfacing with the CPmodule 110 at
synchronization points; and the intermediate data sets will be transferred from the register files of the FP module into
the cache memory 140 (under control of the CP module
110).Thus, when the vector multiply has been completed,
the results will be left in the array in cache 140 which was
previously allocated by the, CP module 110.
(6) The control processor module 110 then writes a
store-data command and an "interrupt host when done"
command to the to the dtp~command FIFO 1510. The store
data command specifies the source address of the result ar
ray in the data cache memory, the destination address (as
specified in the original command), and the array length.
The data transfer processor module 120 is interrupted. If
the cp~command FIFO is empty, the control processor mod
ule 110 returns to its idle state.
(7) In response to the interrupt, the data transfer
processor module 120 leaves its idle state, and reads the
first command (and its parameters) from the dtp~command FIFO. The data transfer processor module 120 checks the
address where data is to be stored, and identifies that it lies
within the VME address space.The data transfer processor
module 120 then sets up the DMA controller 640 in the VME
interface 160 to transfer the correct number of F~words
from the data FIFO 670 to the VME main memory. The data
transfer processor module 120 reads the data from the data cache memory and writes it into the data FIFO 670. When the result array has been transferred into the dataFIFO, the data transfer processor module 120 notifies the DMA controller, and then waits until the DMA controller has finished the transfer to the VME memory.
(8) The dtp~command FIFO is not empty, so the next command is read and executed. This is the "interrupt-hostwhen-finished command. In response to this command, the status of the command just completed is written to the command queue in the VME interface memory, and a host interrupt is generated. The interrupt notifies the host that its vector multiply command has ended, and it can read its status from the status register in the VME interface 160. The data transfer processor module 120 then returns to the idle state. This completes the operation.
There are several points to note regarding the above description:
At any time during the above process, the host could write a new command and its parameters into the command queue, and interrupt the data transfer processor module 120. The DTP module would then generate an interrupt request to the control processor module 110 to notify it of the new command(s). If - possible, their execution will preferably -be started as outlined above. This attempts to keep the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120 fully occupied in processing commands or transferring data, but care needs to be taken so that -unwanted interactions between commands do not occur.
The data address assignments provide considerable flexibility. Each of the interfaces 150, 160, and 170 (and the local data cache memory 140) is assigned a range of addresses that can be accessed through it. This allows the data transfer processor module 120 to control the correct interface to satisfy the data requirements for the command,
without requiring separate command definitions for differ
ent data source or destination locations.
In the example above, the commands originated
from a host on the VME bus, but they could as easily have
come from any of the interfaces (or have been stored as part
of a command list) with very little change to the foregoing
description. The VME host was chosen as an example.
When the total array sizes required for a com
mand exceed the free storage in the data cache memory, the control processor module 110 will attempt to process the
command within the available storage space by dividing the
command into a number of smaller operations. However, for
some types of command this will not be possible, and the
host will be notified of the command's failure.
If the host sends commands too quickly, the in
ternal software FIFOs may become full. To prevent this af
fecting the overall operation, thefollowing precautions are
taken. First, the dtp. command FIFO 1510is at least 3 times
the depth of the cup command FIFO 1520. Since one host
command will rarely result in more than three data transfer
commands, the dtp#command FIFO can -never completely fill
as a result of host commands.
b. When #the cp~command FIFO reaches the nearly
full mark, a status bit in the VME interface is set.
Virtual Memory Model
The virtual memory situation introduces a number of
complications which necessitates more work being done in
the host. These complications arise because the application
has access to a virtual address space that is very much
larger than the physical memory. The total virtual address
space exists only on disk, and the portions of the address
space which the active software currently needs are paged
into memory at run-time as required. This can cause several
types of problems:
o An array, or parts of an array, may be only on disk, and not present in physical memory. Furthermore,parts of an array needed by the accelerator subsystem may be swapped out by to make room for other tasks running in the system.
o The physical address the array is assigned to is not predictable, since it is a function of all the processing history since the computer was started.
o 0 Each virtual memory access goes through a translation procedure to determine a physical address in order to access - a - particular data item. This results in arrays being non-contiguous in: memory or scattered.
To avoid these problems, the arrays need to be locked in physical memory# while the data transfer processor module 120 is transferring them to/from the data cache memory. Ideally, the arrays shoule be made contiguous. If the arrays cannot be made contiguous, then the data transfer processor module 120 must perform a scatter/gather operation as part of the transfer. However, it will need a scatter/gather table to know where the data is distributed in physical memory.
Preferably the application software (running on the host) is given the job of organizing the transfer of data to/from the accelerator subsystem, and handling the memory management functions that go with this. (In practice the application software would not have to concern itself with most of these issues, as the math library routines and a device driver would handle them. The industry standard array processor library routines leave it up to the user to move data to and from the array processor (using library routines). The different layers of software are described below, but at this point no distinctions are among them.)
In the array multiply example described above, the application software undertakes seven steps.The step swhere those marked * are implemented in the host and ** are implemented in the accelerator subsystem:
1) Transfer array A to accelerator subsystem and store at address AA (performed by accelerator).
2) Transfer array B to accelerator subsystem and store at address BB (performed by accelerator).
3) Wait for accelerator subsystem to finish the transfers (performed by host).
4) Multiply the arrays at addresses AA and BB together and store the result at CC (performed by accelerator).
5) Wait for accelerator subsystem to finish the multiply command (performed by host).
6) Transfer array at address CC into host address space (performed by accelerator).
7) Wait for accelerator subsystem to finish the transfer (performed by host).
Some important points to note about this sequence are:
Multiple commands can be sent to the accelerator subsystem. These are queued up and processed.
The host injects synchronization- points between the transfers- and the multiplication, to ensure that multiplication does not start until all the data is present in the data cache memory. -' The host is free to do other work instead of waiting for the accelerator subsystem. However, the host's operating system will normally require an explicit wait operation in order to synchronize with the accelerator subsystem.
Note that steps c and e could optionally be omitted, since the synchronization of transfer and calculation operations can easily be done within the accelerator subsystem as an option. However, this is incompatible with industry de facto standards.
Memory allocation of the data cache memory is handled at a higher level than the CP microcode executive.
The arrays are locked in memory, and the data fragmentation issues are handled by the interface software between the application and the accelerator subsystem. The frequent synchronization (or wait) points result in blocks of memory being locked for shorter periods of time, which places less strain on a multi-user or multi-tasking environment.
To execute a command the following steps occur: - (1) Host writes the command (transfer or calculation) into - the accelerator subsystem's command queue (maintained in the VME interface memory), specifying the command type and the corresponding number of parameters. After the command and its parameters are added to the queue, the host generates an interrupt in the data transfer processor module 120. The host is now free to do other work.
(2) On receiving the interrupt from the host the data transfer processor module 120 suspends its current activity (either idling or some transfer) and examines the command type. The command can be one of three types:
If the command is for the control processor module 110 (i.e is a calculation), the command and its parameters are copied into cp~command FIFO 1520 in the command memory 190. An interrupt is generated in the control processor module 110 to notify it of the command.
The data transfer processor module 120 returns to its previous activity.
If the command is for the data transfer processor module 120 (i.e. is a transfer request), then the command and its parameters are copied into a software maintained dtp~command FIFO in the command memory. The data transfer processor module 120 returns to its previous activity.
If the command is a synchronization command, no further commands are taken from the queue until all outstanding commands have been completed.To implement this, a "wait for all and notify host" command is inserted in the dtp~command queue.
(3) While in the idle state the data transfer processor module 120 is continually checking the dtp~command
FIFO. When this queue it becomes "not empty," the command is fetched from it and the operation carried out. In the case of a transfer from host memory into the data cache memory, for example, the data transfer processor module 120 sets up the DMA controller in the VME interface to fetch the array and write it in to the data FIFO. The data transfer processor module 120 reads the data from the data FIFO and writes it into the data cache memory. When the transfer has finished, the DTP module 120 removes the command from the dtp~command queue. If another command is in the FIFO, it is executed; if the dtp#command queue is empty the data transfer processor module 120 returns to the idle state.
(4) In response to the interrupt, the control processor module 110 leaves its idle state and reads the command and its parameters from the software cp~command FIFO in the command memory. The vector multiply of the arrays at addresse#s AA and BB is completed and the resulting array is left at address CC in the data cache memory. When the command has been executed it is removed from the cp~command FIFO 1520. If no other command exists the control processor module 110 returns to its idle state.
There are several points to note from the above description:
There is much less internal control and synchronization between the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120 than in the physical memory model. The data transfer processor module 120 performs more of a control (or command routing) function than the control processor module 110.
There are three queues active, one for the host
communication, one for the DTP's work, and one for the CP's
work.
If any calculation requires more storage than is
available on the accelerator subsystem in the data cache memory, then it is the host's responsibility to split the calculation up into smaller parts.
CP and FP Interaction
The control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130 interact very closely in order to implement an algorithm. The control processor module 110 cal culates addresses and handles the data transfer between the data# cache memory and the floating-point processor module
130, while the floating-point processor module 130 does the data calculations. This interaction is independent of the type of interface between the control processor module 110, data transfer processor module 120 and host computer.
In the vector multiply command the floating-point processor module 130 calculates the vector multiplies, eight elements at a time; Thus, for a large array, there could be several thousand interactions (called synchronization points) between the control processor module 110 and floatingpoint processor module 130. The synchronization points, in this example, occur about every 400 ns and it is therefore very important to make them efficient.
In most cases the control processor module 110 is able to do the address calculations and data transfers more quickly than the floating-point processor module 130 can do the data calculations. If the reverse is true, then the waiting role is also reversed.
As discussed above, two flags (CPWAIT and FPWAIT) control the synchronization between both processors. The
FPWAIT flag is cleared by the control processor module 110 when it has transferred the next set of data to or from the floating-point processor module 130. By testing this flag the floating-point processor module 130 can tell whether it can proceed through the synchronization point or needs to wait for the control processor module 1 10.The CPWAIT flag is cleared by the floating-point processor module 130 when it has finished the data calculations and is monitored by the control processor module 110. The hardware is arranged so that when a flag has been cleared to allow a processor through the synchronization point, it is automatically set once the synchronization point has been passed.
Figure 22 is a state diagram which shows how the FP
WAIT, CPWAIT, FPDON"E, and CPDONE flags are used to reg
ulate the data interface between the CP module 110 and the
FP module 130.
There have been many different implementations of
handshaking logic and semaphoring between processors.
However, the state diagram --shown in Figure 22 is very ad
vantageous, and is believed to be novel.
The data transfers betwe#en the control processor
module 110 and' floating-point processor module 13Q are
double buffered, so that while the floating-point processor
module 130 is working on one set of data the control proces
sor module" 110 can be working on the other. The double
buffering is accomplished in software, asdescribed above.
Both processors have signals to control the swapping of the
buffer, and these are "ANDed" together so the swap only oc
curs when both are active.
The vector multiply will take place in ~ the following
steps: (steps with the same number occur in parallel). These
steps are also schematically represented in the flow chart of
Figure 33.
(1) The control processor module 110 sets the
FPWAIT flag, and starts the floating-point processor module 130 running the vector^ multiply microcode. The floatingpoint processor module 130 waits for the FPWAIT flag to be cleared.
(2) The control processor module 110 transfers the first 8 elements from both arrays into the double buffer (which, physically, is provided by the two banks of the register files 430, as described above). The CP module then swaps the double buffer over to give the floating-point processor module 130 access to the data, and clears the FPWAIT flag.
(3) The control processor module 110 transfers the next 8 elements from both arrays into the double buffer and clears the FPWAIT flag. It then waits for the CPWAIT flag to be cleared (by the floating-point processor module 130).
(3b) The floating-point processor module 130, on detecting the FPWAIT flag being cleared, starts "'calculat- ing the vector multiply for the 8 pairs of elements stored on floating-point processor module 130 side of the double buffer. The 8 results are written back into the double buffer and the CPWAIT flag is cleared. In this example, the control processor module 110 has already finished and cleared the
FPWAIT flag, so the floating-point processor module 130 can change the buffers over and start the next set of calculations immediately.
(4a) The control processor module 110 transfers the 8 results from the double buffer into the data cache memory and - then transfers the next 8 elements from both arrays into the double buffer and clears the FPWAIT flag. It then waits for the CPWAIT flag to be cleared (by the floating-point processor module 130).
(4b) The floating-point processor -module 130, on detecting the FPWAIT flag being cleared, starts calculating the vector multiply for the 8 pairs of elements stored on its side of the double buffer. The 8 results are written back into the double buffer, and the CPWAIT flag is cleared. In this example, the control processor module 110 has already finished and cleared the FPWAIT flag, so the floating-point processor module 130 can swap the buffers over and start the next set of calculations.
(5) Steps (4a) and (4b) are repeated until the complete vector multiply has been completed.
(6) At the end of step (5) the final set of results are still stored on the FP's side of the double buffer, so the control processor module 110 swaps the buffers over and transfers the last results into the data cache memory.
Software Hierarchy
In -the operation of systems like that of Figure 1, preferably the overall run time software environment is separated into several very distinct levels. Some of the levels exist because they are distinct modules of code that run on separate processors, and other levels exist to divide the different levels of interfacing required. All these levels and the inter-level interfacing are under software control, and can be changed if they do not fit into the application's requirements.
This software organization is generally quite conven
tional. However, it is explicitly set out here to provide a clear
picture of the preferred use of the described innovations.
Figure 44A, 44B, and 44C show the programming envi
ronment of a system like that shown in Figure 1. Note that
many of the functional blocks shown have reference numer
als corresponding to those of hardware elements in other
figures, but Figures 44A, 44B, and 44C are intended to show
these blocks in the relation they might appear to a pro
grammer. Therefore, it should be noted that these figures do
not necessarily correspond exactly to the actual electrical
and logical connections.
Application and Library Software
The following description assumes that the application software will be written in a high level language, typically
FORTRAN or 'C', and will call standard library routines to use the accelerator subsystem. The calls conform to the de facto industry standard (i e. are generally compatible with the in- struction set of products from Floating Point Systems). They include routines to transfer data between the applications data area and the accelerator subsystem's data cache memory, a wide variety of calculations, and some synchronization routines.
The software at this level runs on the host computer system and implements the desired application. It is linked to the libraries to gain access to accelerator subsystem.
The libraries are the interface to the accelerator subsystem system that the application software sees. The libraries consists of several hundred common arithmetic/algorithmic functions, as well as routines to initialize the accelerator subsystem system and initiate data transfers of the application's arrays or data sets. Most library routines will do little more that pass the input parameters and a function number onto a device driver, but some form of parameter validation could be implemented if desired. In the presently preferred ~ embodiment the interface to the device driver is via system calls. However, in some operating systems system calls carry heavy overheads because the calling task is submitted for rescheduling.
Device driver
The device driver can be considered as part of the operating system, and runs at a more privileged level than the
application software. Its main responsibilities are:
1) Transferring the commands and parameters
from the library routines into the command queue main
tained in the accelerator subsystem's VME interface mem ory. This entails some queue management and handling of the situation when the queue is full.
2) Making sure that any data to be transferred (in virtual memory systems) is locked in memory. This requires that the transfers have been split into contiguous blocks and multiple small transfers have actually taken place, or scatter/gather tables have been built and given to the accelerator subsystem.
3) Loading microcode into the multiple processors, and generally bringing the hardware and microcode up to a known state (either after power-on, or in preparation for a new application to use it).
One of the most difficult aspects of porting the li braries and device driver onto a new host is the device driver. These tend to be very operating-system specific, and require an intimate knowledge of the host system. Optionally, to avoid such problems, the libraries can interface to the hardware directly if physical memory accesses are allowed. This bypasses the need for a driver. This method of accessing the accelerator subsystem will be much faster than using the device driver. However, it# will also be less secure, especially in a multi-user environment.
Microcode Executive
The microcode executive handles the residue of tasks, other than transfer and calculation, in the accelerator subsystem. Its main tasks are communication with the host, distribution of work between the control processor module 110 and data transfer processor module 120, and internal and external synchronization.
The executive is positioned on the other end of the queue from the device driver, and takes work off the queue.
(This entails some queue management to ensure that work is not taken from an empty queue.)
The level of complexity will decide on which processor(s) are used, and will depend largely on how much of the work the host wants to, or can, offload onto the accelerator subsystem. The description of the vector multiply command with the physical and virtual memory models demonstrated the different approaches the executive could take.
In a physical memory architecture, the executive is split between the data transfer processor module 120 and the control processor module 110. The data transfer processor module 120 part does little more than command routing, because the host and control processor module 110 cannot exchange information directly. The control processor module 110 organizes the distribution of work and the handshaking.
Note that this split is somewhat arbitrary. In an alternative (and less preferred) architecture, the control processor module 110 could act as a slave processor to the data transfer processor module 120, rather than the other way around.
In the virtual memory model the data transfer processor module 120 was the master and the control processor module 110 acted as the slave. Most of the control aspects are handled in the host so the DTP's part of the executive only concerns itself with command routing. The control processor module 110 contributes a small amount of queue management.
Microcode Transfer Routines (DTP)
These routines concern themselves with the transfer of data between one of the external interfaces and the data cache memory. The interface will primarily be to the VME bus (and hence to the host memory).
Most of the transfers between the host memory and the data cache memory will fit into a very narrow range of different types, such as:
contiguous block transfer
transfer with scatter/gather collection
every nth word
row/column 2-D array accesses
Any types of transfers that do not fall into one of these categories can easily be added as required. An important point to note here is that a vector add will use the same transfer routines as a vector multiply. This is useful, as discussed above, since the data transfer routines (as opposed to the calculation routines) do not have to distinguish between a vector add and a vector multiply.
Microcode Transfer Routines (CP)
These routines concern themselves with the transfer of data between one of the data cache memory and the fast register files of the floating-point processor module 130
Again, most of the transfers between the data cache memory and the register files will fit into a small range of different types, such as:
one vector in, one vector out
two vectors in, one vector out
one vector in, a scalar(s) out.
These transfer types can be further classified according to
their data type. The vectors could be simple or complex' data
types, and there are a number of more specialized transfer
types (such as FFT, convolution, etc.) that are more efficient
if the general routines are not used.
The important thing to note here is that the same
transfer a vector add will use the same transfer routines as
a vector multiply, for example.
Microcode Calculation Routines (FP)
For each calculation type, there is a routine to perform
the eight (for example) adds, subtracts or whatever is neces
sary. The data transfers governed by such routines would be
only those within the closely coupled data path which in cludes the fast register. files 430, the multiplier 450, the adder 440, and the scratchpad memory 1610.(This data path also includes several local busses, including the first operand local bus 431, the second operand local bus 432, the results local bus 433, and the loopback connection 434.)
Again, many of the required routines fall into a small number of standard data-format categories. One example of such a category is diadactic vector operations (two vectors in, one vector out; e.g. vector add or vector multiply).Thus, standard templates can be set up for each calculation type within a category. This allows the rapid production of FP microcode to'. implement many of the basic vector operations.
As discussed above, a registered operation specifier may be used to supplement the microcode operation commands. This permits all the separate routines in a category of calculation types to be formally written as a single routine. In this case the control processor module 11-O must load the operation register to specify the calculation type.
Compacted Microcode
Note that the system. described above has the capability to use compacted microcode, wherein an operation ,specifier held in a register can be combined with the reminder of the microcode instruction. This is actually used in the FP module 130, in the presently preferred embodiment, as described above.
Such a compacted microcode is particularly advantageous in a numeric processing portion of a multiprocessor subsystem. In this case, the use of operation-specifier-compacted microcode helps to reduce the need for overlaying operations.
Thus, for example, for operations which -mapped two arrays onto a third array (e.g. Ci = Ai + Bi), the instruction register could be loaded with an operation specifier (e.g.
"ADD") before a sequence of such operations was begun. The sequence of operations would then be stated in code which did not specify the operation directly.
Thus, this capability for real-time expansion of microcode makes the interface between two microcoded processors, in a multiprocessor system, much more flexible.
This also greatly simplifies the bandwidth requirements of loading instructions into the numeric processing portion. Thus, algorithm switching and re-partitioning of tasks -generally become more efficient.
Multiwav Branching
As discussed above regarding Figures 3A and 3B, the present invention provides significant new capabilities for multiway branching in microcoded systems. Figure 30 schematically shows the microcode operation used in the presently preferred embodiment to provide multiway branching without address boundary constraints.
As described above, the present invention provides an
architecture for microcoded computer systems with no ad
dress constraints on multiway branching. -Moreover, the in
crement between alternative destinations is variable, A se
quencer with relative addressing capability is used.
The presently preferred embodiment uses the pro
gram counter as an input to the jump destination. This is
different from many previous implementations of multiway
branching, where the base destination address is supplied
from a different source.
Discrete Fourier Transform Implementation
Figure 31 diagrammatically shows some key features
of an innovative implementation of a discrete integral
transform. In this example, the transform being imple
mented is a fast Fourier transform (FFT).
The example shown is a 16 point radix-2 complex FFT.
Of course, real-world FFT implementations will use many
more data points, but this example clearly shows some im
portant points. An n-point FFT normally requires log2n
stages, so that a 1024-point FFT would require 10 stages.
Each stage requires n/2 butterfly calculations to be per
formed.
The butterfly calculation is given by:
rO = r4 + [ (r6 * r8) + (r7 * r9) ] rl = r5 + ((r7 * r8) - (r6 * r9))
r2 = r4 - [(r6 * r8) + (r7 * r9) ]
r3 = r5 - ((r7 * r8) - (r6 * r9)),
where:
rO and rl are the real and imaginary parts of result C
r2 and r3 are -the real and imaginary parts of result D r4 and r5 are the real and imaginary parts of input A
r6 and r7 are the real and imaginary parts of input B r8 and r9 are the real and imaginary parts of coefficient k.
(Note that the subexpressions enclosed in square brackets - [ ] are formally identical, and the subexpressions enclosed in curly brackets () are also formally identical.)
Figure 31 represents a four-stage FFT operation diagrammatically, with each circle representing one -butterfly calculation. The lines connecting to the left of each circle show where the complex input samples (A and B) to the butterfly calculation come from, and the lines connecting to the right indicate where the complex results (C and D) are written to. The numbers within the circles are the complex phase coefficients "k".
In the presently preferred embodiment of this method, the FFT algorithm is implemented by being partitioned, in an architecture like that shown in Figure 1, between the control processor module 110 and floating-point processor module 130. As Figure 31 shows, the address calculations are not insignificant, especially where a large number of data points is needed. The control processor module 110 performs the address calculations, to provide the correct stream of data samples and phase coefficients for the butterfly calculations. The butterfly calculations are actually performed by the floating-point processor module 130.
The shaded bars marked on some of the data points, at each stage, show the innovative data handling provided by this embodiment. The shaded bars shown at each stage show one intermediate set of data transfers. Thus, for example, at the very beginning of the process, 8 complex words (C~words) of input data loaded in. This amount of data provides sufficient input to perform four butterfly calculations.
(Coefficients must also be provided.) The shaded bars indicate that (for example) for the first set of four butterflies, C~words XO, X1, X2, X3, X4, X8, X9, X10, and Xli would be loaded in. Four butterfly calculations are performed, and eight C~words of result are then transferred out.In addition, loading the correct correct set of phase coefficients may require -some additional transfers. (Only one phase coefficient is used at the first stage, but note that the number of different phase coefficients k doubles at each
stage.) Thus, at least four full cycles of bus 144 will be re
quired for each set of four buttersflies: two full cycles to
bring in eight C~words of input, and two full cycles to re
move eight CLwo?d# of results. (In addition, a fifth major cy
cle may be necessary to transfer in the coefficients.)
Eight C~words is equal to 512 bits, or sixteen F words, so it may be seen that this is a quite significant block of
data.However, this method has proven to be an advanta
geous way to make use of the high-bandwidth interface
provided by the presently preferred embodiment.
Moreover, transferring data in blocks of this size turns
out to work very well with the CP/FP handshaking logic
used at synchronization points.
Thus, the FFT software is partitioned into two parts:
The control processor module 110 runs software running which calculates the address of the complex data, and the phase coefficient position in a table sequence,as a function of the stage and butterfly numbers. Once the addresses have been calculated, the process running in the control processor module also controls the transfer of the data and coefficients into the floating-point processor module 130. When the floating-point processor module 130 has completed the butterfly calculations (and sets flags to indicate that it is at a synchronization point), the control processor module 110 reads the results and saves them.Note that the control processor module 110 has no knowledge of the butterfly calculatidn; it merely interchanges data with the floating-point processor module 130 at synchronization points.
The FP module 130 runs software which calculates the butterfly by a simple linear sequence of instructions that implements the equations as defined above. This routine does not need to take account of the complicated address calculations needed to provide the correct input data and coefficients. This routine can therefore be written in total isolation from the software running on the CP module 110. -
An advantageous feature of this partition is that the FP procedure at each stage can be exactly the same, until the last two stages. (The butterfly calculations performed during the last two stages use C~word inputs which fall more closely together, so that some intermediate results can be carried forward inside the FP, as data held in register 430.)
This example also demonstrates the capability for processor independence. The procedures executed by the FP module 130 are so simply defined that, if the floating-point processor module 130 were redesigned around a different calculation unit chip set, then only this simple butterfly routine would require changing. This may well be confined to a re-assembly operation.
The execution of the CP and FP software occurs in parallel, and is pipelined so that the speed at which an algorithm runs is determined by the slowest part.
Note that the FP instruction sequence, in implementing this butterfly calculation, remains the same for all except the last two butterflies in the FFT. Thus, for example, in a 1024point complex FFT, the FP module would execute the same instruction sequence 512, to do the calculations for the first eight stages. Only then would the FFT begin running a different instruction sequence, for the last two stages..
FFT with Multiple FP modules
Alternatively, a particularly attractive configuration is a system, like that shown in Figure 10, which contains four
FP modules 130.
There are two key factors which affect performance: the butterfly calculation time, and the data transfer bandwidth to the"butterfly calculator" (e.g. the FP module
130). The achieved performance is determined by whichever of these parameters is not met. The following
sample calculation relates to a 1K complex FFT, radix 2.
Butterfly Calculation Throughput:
The basic radix 2 FFT butterfly equations consist of ten
operations (4 multiplies and 6 add/subtracts) when partial results can be reused. With a system like that of Figure 1 (or
Figure 10) this calculation takes 10 cycles, because the
equations don't lend themselves to using the ALU and
Multiplier in parallel. Using a 42 ns cycle time, the butterfly
calculation will take 420 ns. The true cycle times of 28 ns for
the 6 ALU operations and 42 ns f-or the four multiplies (330
ns in total) have been derated to 400 ns for this estimate, to
cover overheads such as synchronization, pipeline startup,
etc.Thus, one FP module 130 can calculate a butterfly in 400
ns.
Transfer bandwidth.
Each radix 2 butterfly calculation requires 2 complex samples, and a complex coefficient (or twiddle factor). It produces 2 complex results. In total 5 complex numbers or ten floating point words need to be transferred per butterfly between the data cache memory 140 and the FPU. The cache memory -bandwidth is 320 Mbytes per second, or 80M floating point words per second. This data rate is only achieved when 8 consecutive words can be transferred in one memory cycle (100 ns). However, when executing an
FFT this can always be done.The most efficient way to use the memory bandwidth is to transfer data for 4 butterflies per memory cycle. Thus four butterfly calculations require 5 memory transfer cycles.
A 1K complex FFT (radix 2) contains 5120 butterflies.
The minimum time permitted by the data transfer rate for this FFT is therefore given by: (5120 / 4) * 5 * 100 ns=640 microseconds.
However, this throughput estimate must be modified, by considering the effect of the last two stages. Each data set (8 C~words) of results from a set of four butterfly càlcula- tions at stage n-2 is sufficient to calculate 4 butterflies for stage n and 4 butterflies for stage n+l, without returning' the intermediate results back to memory. An additional set of coefficients will, however, be needed for the second stage.
The net result of this is that 8 butterflies can be calculated with only 6 memory cycles. (This technique is further described at pages 577 and 599 of L. Rabiner and B. Gold, Theory and application of digital signal processing.)
A 1K complex FFT (radix 2) contains 5120 butterflies so the minimum time as governed by the data transfer rate with this two stage FFT algorithm is: (5120 / 8) * 6 * 100 ns=384 microseconds.
This time is less than the estimated transfer time of 400 microseconds. Therefore, the available memory bandwidth is well matched to a set of four FP modules working together to achieve an FFT in 400 microseconds.
There are several techniques that can be used to reduce the bandwidth requirements further:
1. The number of different coefficients used within a stage varies. For example stage 1 uses 1 coefficient value for all butterflies, stage 2 uses 2 coefficients, stage 3 uses four coefficients, etc, and stage 10 uses 512 coefficients.
For the earlier stages, there are big savings to be made in the memory bandwidth by initializing the coefficients at the beginning bf the stage and not on every butterfly.
2. If four FFTs are performed in parallel (so -that each of four FP modules 130, in a single accelerator subsystem, is used to calculate a separate FFT, rather than one quarter of one FFT, then the coefficients can be broadcast to all four FPs. This reduces the memory bandwidth used by the coefficient part of the transfers.
3. The two stage butterfly calculation can be extended to three or four stages, the limiting factor being the
size of the FP's register files to hold the new data, the
current data, and any intermediate storage. For example, a
four stage algorithm requires 16 samples and 8 coefficients,
and produces 16 results after 32 butterfly calculations; This
gives a ratio of 10 memory cycles per 32 butterflies, which
will allow the cache memory bandwidth to support an FFT
calculation every 160 microseconds.
All these ideas can be used with a radix 4 or radix 8
FFT if desired. In fact, the very wide cache bus architecture
provided may be particularly advantageous with higher
radix algorithms.
It should also be noted that other integral transforms
can be similarly partitioned into stages of multiple butterfly
calculations, although the butterfly definitions and the rela
tions of the stages may be different. Thus, the foregoing
teachings regarding data manipulation can be applied to
other discrete integral transforms as well.
pistogram Algorithm Implementation
Figure 32 shows a method of running a histogram algorithm, in hardware like that shown in Figure 16.
As Figure 16 shows, the data path, in the calculation portion of the numeric processor subsystem 130, preferably includes not only a multiplier 440 and an adder 450, but also a scratchpad memory 1610 which is very closely coupled to this portion of the data path. (This memory includes address logic 1611.)
This scratchpad memory 1611 gives the module 130 the ability to calculate an address and fetch the data locally.
Without the memory 1610, the FP module 130 would have to give the -address to the CP module 110, which in turn would do the lookup function and return the result back to the FP module 130. Note that this would require significant additional handshaking, which would be very inefficient.
Thus, the architecture of th#is small-scale data-path portion also cooperates advantageously with the large-scale datahandling architecture used for interface to the numeric processing -module, as described above.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the scratchpad memory 1610 can be used in three ways: it can be used as a table memory, for algorithms such as calculation of transcendental functions; it can be used as a local stack; or it can be used in histogram algorithms, to collect results.
The ability to use this scratchpad memory as a stack is particularly advantageous, since this permits the data interface, at the edge of the calculation portion of the subsystem, to be defined in a way which is very advantageous for the overall architecture, without requiring that the register files at that interface be capable -of utilization as a stack.
Compilation of routines from common high-level lan
guages (such as FORTRAN) into microcode is important way
of generating microcode programs. Compilation of vector op
erations into efficient microcode is relatively easy. However,
there will nearly always be a significant fraction of scalar
operations as well, and compilation of these is a significantly
trickier.
It has been discovered that compilation of scalar rou
tines into microcode proceeds particularly well if a stack
based architecture can be used as the virtual machine. (The
conventional procedure for doing this uses translation into reverse Polish logic.)
The use of this scratchpad memory to accumulate re
sults is particularly advantageous with histogram algo
rithms. When histogram algorithms are run, the histogram
data can be accumulated in the table memory. This avoids
adding access load to the data cache bus.
The use of a closely coupled local memory to collect
histogram data is particularly advantageous in image pro
cessing algorithms. Many known image processing algo
rithms use histogram computations, but the massive vol
umes of data which must be handled means that cache
bandwidth is at a premium. This innovative teaching helps
make the use of histogram algorithms more useful.
Figure' 32 shows a simple example of a fairly typical
histogram procedure which is applicable to many image pro
cessing problems. Note that the histogram table is accessed
at every iteration of the inner loop of this procedure.
Therefore, providing a very closely coupled storage for the
histogram table -will tremendously reduce the bandwidth
requirements for a procedure of this kind.
pipelined Algorithm with Preview
A significant teaching contained herein is a method of
running a pipelined algorithm, using a software-controlled double buffer with a preview mode to maintain average throughput through synchronization points.
Figure 33 shows a method of running a pipelined algorithm, in hardware which includes a software-controlled double buffer like that shown in Figure 20.
As noted above, the use of a software-controlled double buffer is very useful in crossing a clock boundary between high-speed calculation units and a higher level of control. However, it should be noted that the advantages of a software-controlled double buffer extend to a very wide variety of pipelined algorithms.
The preferred subsystem for double buffering uses a dual port memory, partitioned in software so that the top half of the memory is allocated to one processor, and the bottom half to the other. (This allocation is switched when both processors set respective flag bits indicating that they are ready to switch.)
On accesses to this memory, additional bits tag the access as "physical," "logical," or "preview." A physical access is interpreted as a literal address within the full memory, and the double buffering is ignored. A logical access is supplemented by an additional address bit, determined by the double buffering. switch state.
A preview access is used for read access only, and goes to the opposite bank of memory from that which would be accessed in a logical access. The use of preview access can be particularly advantageous in avoiding data flow inefficiencies at synchronization points in pipelined algorithms.
For example, if the standard double buffering techniques were used in a system like that shown in Figure 1, it would be necessary to refill the data pipeline after every swap and empty it before. In this sample embodiment, a simple vector operation require the floating-point processor to do 8 calculations for each buffer's worth of data. This means that three cycles of overhead are used, to fill and empty the pipeline, for every eight words of data. Obviously, this adds a high percentage on to the overall average processing time.
One of the innovative teachings set forth herein is that "soft" double buffering can be used to overcome this problem. The preview mode (described above) allows one port to preview the data in the other half before it is swapped. This later mode provides a means for the floating-point processor pipeline to be kept full when the control processor has finished its work and is waiting to swap buffers before continuing.
Preferably double buffering is used in a register file at the interface between a numeric processor and a large data cache memory in a multiprocessor system. The partitioning of the register file avoids data collisions in the cache memory 140.
In this sample embodiment, a 5-ported register file 430 is used to implement the memory for the double buffer.
However, a wide variety of other implementations could be used instead.
This innovation provides much greater flexibility than conventional systems which perform double buffering in hardware, at no loss in speed.
In particular, the "preview" mode permits this doublebuffering implementation to be used as a versatile interface architecture in many pipelined environments.
Factors Limiting Performance
There are six fundamental factors that can limit maxi
mum performance. They are:
The I/O bandwidth (which in the presently pre
ferred embodiments 40 Mbytes per second);
The data cache memory bandwidth (which in the
presently preferred embodiments 320 Mbytes per second);
The data transfer rate between the floating-point processor module 130 holding registers and the register file.
This is currently less than the data cache memory bandwidth.
Address calculation rate (which in the presently preferred embodiments typically 10 million per second,but this is very dependent on the algorithm being run)..
The sustained floating point calculation rate. In th'e presently preferred embodiment, for a single precision 'add' this is less than 28 ns cycle time (and likely to improve as faster components become available), and for a single precision multiply it is less than 42 ns cycle time.
The number of numeric processing modules used in parallel.
Performance assessment
The factor which determines the performance for a particular algorithm depends very much on which of the following conditions' apply:
o Where the source data and results are - stored:
The best performance is achieved when the data is stored in the data cache memory. If the data is stored off board, 'then it is very like#ly -that the' data I/O transfer rate will be the limiting factor. - The achievable I/O rate - will usually be determined by the peripherals involved and the type of transfers supported (single or block). An I/O rate of 40
Mbytes per second will limit the calculation rate to 3.3
Mflops, for - a calculation where three numbers are involved in every calculation.
o The ratio of data to arithmetic operations. This determines whether the floating point calculation rate or the data transfer rate is the bottle-neck. Algorithms which require relatively little data for the amount of calculations (e.g.
FFTs) will be limited by the floating-point processor module
130 speed. An example of an algorithm that is data transfer limited is vector add which requires 3 data values per arithmetic operation.
o The layout of data in data cache memory: The maximum transfer rate between the data cache memory and the floating-point processor module 130 is only achievable when 8 contiguous F~words (i.e. floating-point words, of 32 bits each) are transferred together. If the data for an algorithm cannot make use of this block transfer ability, then the net data transfer rate will drop.
This is tabulated below:
Number of F words Transfer rate
8 80 MF~words per second
4 40
2 20
1 10
Most algorithms can make use of the higher transfer rates.
(In fact, even the FFT can make use of higher transfer rates, as discussed above.)
o Overlapped operations: This allows off-board I/O transfers to occur in parallel to the floating point calculations. If the algorithms (or sequence of algorithms) can use this facility then the relatively slow I/O transfer rate might not effect the overall calculation rate.
o Multiple FPs: When an algorithm is calculation bound and not limited by the memory or I/O bandwidth then multiple FPs can give a multiple of the single floatingpoint processor module 130 performance, providing the memory bandwidth is not exceeded. For example, with 4 FPs there is no increase in the vector add performance but an
FFT is calculated 4 times faster.
As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, the innovations disclosed herein can be applied in a wide variety of contexts, and are subject to a wide range of modification and variation. Therefore, the full scope of claimed patent protection is not defined by any of the sample em bodiments set forth herein, nor by any statements made herein concerning those embodiments, but is defined solely by the claims appended hereto.
Claims (1)
- What is claimed is:at least three processors, including a control processor, a numeric processor, and at least one application-customized processor, which runs faster than said numeric processor at a predetermined class of operations, each of said three processors being concurrently operable asynchronously with the others; wherein said control processor selectively commands said numeric processor and said applicationcustomized processor to execute an instruction sequence.
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
GB8806851A GB2215877A (en) | 1988-03-23 | 1988-03-23 | Data processing system |
EP19890302830 EP0334627A3 (en) | 1988-03-23 | 1989-03-22 | Multiprocessor architecture |
JP6939589A JPH0228721A (en) | 1988-03-23 | 1989-03-23 | Processing system |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
GB8806851A GB2215877A (en) | 1988-03-23 | 1988-03-23 | Data processing system |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
GB8806851D0 GB8806851D0 (en) | 1988-04-27 |
GB2215877A true GB2215877A (en) | 1989-09-27 |
Family
ID=10633916
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
GB8806851A Withdrawn GB2215877A (en) | 1988-03-23 | 1988-03-23 | Data processing system |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
GB (1) | GB2215877A (en) |
Citations (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO1987002800A1 (en) * | 1985-10-24 | 1987-05-07 | Culler Scientific Systems Corporation | Integrated, multicomputer data processing system |
-
1988
- 1988-03-23 GB GB8806851A patent/GB2215877A/en not_active Withdrawn
Patent Citations (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO1987002800A1 (en) * | 1985-10-24 | 1987-05-07 | Culler Scientific Systems Corporation | Integrated, multicomputer data processing system |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
GB8806851D0 (en) | 1988-04-27 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US5428754A (en) | Computer system with clock shared between processors executing separate instruction streams | |
US5056015A (en) | Architectures for serial or parallel loading of writable control store | |
US5329630A (en) | System and method using double-buffer preview mode | |
US5042000A (en) | Integral transform method | |
Lubbers et al. | ReconOS: An RTOS supporting hard-and software threads | |
JP2519226B2 (en) | Processor | |
Heath | Embedded systems design | |
US5036453A (en) | Master/slave sequencing processor | |
EP0334627A2 (en) | Multiprocessor architecture | |
Heath | Microprocessor Architectures: RISC, CISC and DSP | |
Heath | Microprocessor architectures and systems: RISC, CISC and DSP | |
GB2217064A (en) | Interfacing asynchronous processors | |
GB2215883A (en) | Data processing system | |
EP0334621A2 (en) | System with improved instruction execution | |
GB2217056A (en) | Double buffering in multi-processor | |
EP0334624A2 (en) | Microcoded computer system | |
GB2215877A (en) | Data processing system | |
GB2217063A (en) | Lifo memory | |
GB2217059A (en) | Multiprocessor system | |
GB2223609A (en) | High-bandwidth numeric processing | |
GB2215880A (en) | Variable length data field processing | |
GB2217062A (en) | Numeric processor with smart clock | |
GB2217061A (en) | Data processing system debugging | |
GB2215879A (en) | Numerical processor using microcode | |
GB2215884A (en) | Parallel load via wide bus |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WAP | Application withdrawn, taken to be withdrawn or refused ** after publication under section 16(1) |